1 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
3 \# Copyright 1996-2009 The NASM Authors - All Rights Reserved
4 \# See the file AUTHORS included with the NASM distribution for
5 \# the specific copyright holders.
7 \# Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
8 \# modification, are permitted provided that the following
11 \# * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
12 \# notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
13 \# * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above
14 \# copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
15 \# disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided
16 \# with the distribution.
18 \# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
19 \# CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
20 \# INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
21 \# MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
22 \# DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
23 \# CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
24 \# SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
25 \# NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
26 \# LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
27 \# HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
28 \# CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
29 \# OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
30 \# EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
32 \# --------------------------------------------------------------------------
34 \# Source code to NASM documentation
36 \M{category}{Programming}
37 \M{title}{NASM - The Netwide Assembler}
39 \M{author}{The NASM Development Team}
40 \M{copyright_tail}{-- All Rights Reserved}
41 \M{license}{This document is redistributable under the license given in the file "COPYING" distributed in the NASM archive.}
42 \M{auxinfo}{This release is dedicated to the memory of Charles A. Crayne. We miss you, Chuck.}
43 \M{summary}{This file documents NASM, the Netwide Assembler: an assembler targetting the Intel x86 series of processors, with portable source.}
46 \M{infotitle}{The Netwide Assembler for x86}
47 \M{epslogo}{nasmlogo.eps}
53 \IR{-MD} \c{-MD} option
54 \IR{-MF} \c{-MF} option
55 \IR{-MG} \c{-MG} option
56 \IR{-MP} \c{-MP} option
57 \IR{-MQ} \c{-MQ} option
58 \IR{-MT} \c{-MT} option
79 \IR{!=} \c{!=} operator
80 \IR{$, here} \c{$}, Here token
81 \IR{$, prefix} \c{$}, prefix
84 \IR{%%} \c{%%} operator
85 \IR{%+1} \c{%+1} and \c{%-1} syntax
87 \IR{%0} \c{%0} parameter count
89 \IR{&&} \c{&&} operator
91 \IR{..@} \c{..@} symbol prefix
93 \IR{//} \c{//} operator
95 \IR{<<} \c{<<} operator
96 \IR{<=} \c{<=} operator
97 \IR{<>} \c{<>} operator
99 \IR{==} \c{==} operator
100 \IR{>} \c{>} operator
101 \IR{>=} \c{>=} operator
102 \IR{>>} \c{>>} operator
103 \IR{?} \c{?} MASM syntax
104 \IR{^} \c{^} operator
105 \IR{^^} \c{^^} operator
106 \IR{|} \c{|} operator
107 \IR{||} \c{||} operator
108 \IR{~} \c{~} operator
109 \IR{%$} \c{%$} and \c{%$$} prefixes
111 \IR{+ opaddition} \c{+} operator, binary
112 \IR{+ opunary} \c{+} operator, unary
113 \IR{+ modifier} \c{+} modifier
114 \IR{- opsubtraction} \c{-} operator, binary
115 \IR{- opunary} \c{-} operator, unary
116 \IR{! opunary} \c{!} operator, unary
117 \IR{alignment, in bin sections} alignment, in \c{bin} sections
118 \IR{alignment, in elf sections} alignment, in \c{elf} sections
119 \IR{alignment, in win32 sections} alignment, in \c{win32} sections
120 \IR{alignment, of elf common variables} alignment, of \c{elf} common
122 \IR{alignment, in obj sections} alignment, in \c{obj} sections
123 \IR{a.out, bsd version} \c{a.out}, BSD version
124 \IR{a.out, linux version} \c{a.out}, Linux version
125 \IR{autoconf} Autoconf
127 \IR{bitwise and} bitwise AND
128 \IR{bitwise or} bitwise OR
129 \IR{bitwise xor} bitwise XOR
130 \IR{block ifs} block IFs
131 \IR{borland pascal} Borland, Pascal
132 \IR{borland's win32 compilers} Borland, Win32 compilers
133 \IR{braces, after % sign} braces, after \c{%} sign
135 \IR{c calling convention} C calling convention
136 \IR{c symbol names} C symbol names
137 \IA{critical expressions}{critical expression}
138 \IA{command line}{command-line}
139 \IA{case sensitivity}{case sensitive}
140 \IA{case-sensitive}{case sensitive}
141 \IA{case-insensitive}{case sensitive}
142 \IA{character constants}{character constant}
143 \IR{common object file format} Common Object File Format
144 \IR{common variables, alignment in elf} common variables, alignment
146 \IR{common, elf extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{elf} extensions to
147 \IR{common, obj extensions to} \c{COMMON}, \c{obj} extensions to
148 \IR{declaring structure} declaring structures
149 \IR{default-wrt mechanism} default-\c{WRT} mechanism
152 \IR{dll symbols, exporting} DLL symbols, exporting
153 \IR{dll symbols, importing} DLL symbols, importing
155 \IR{dos archive} DOS archive
156 \IR{dos source archive} DOS source archive
157 \IA{effective address}{effective addresses}
158 \IA{effective-address}{effective addresses}
160 \IR{elf, 16-bit code and} ELF, 16-bit code and
161 \IR{elf shared libraries} ELF, shared libraries
164 \IR{executable and linkable format} Executable and Linkable Format
165 \IR{extern, obj extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{obj} extensions to
166 \IR{extern, rdf extensions to} \c{EXTERN}, \c{rdf} extensions to
167 \IR{floating-point, constants} floating-point, constants
168 \IR{floating-point, packed bcd constants} floating-point, packed BCD constants
170 \IR{freelink} FreeLink
171 \IR{functions, c calling convention} functions, C calling convention
172 \IR{functions, pascal calling convention} functions, Pascal calling
174 \IR{global, aoutb extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{aoutb} extensions to
175 \IR{global, elf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{elf} extensions to
176 \IR{global, rdf extensions to} \c{GLOBAL}, \c{rdf} extensions to
178 \IR{got relocations} \c{GOT} relocations
179 \IR{gotoff relocation} \c{GOTOFF} relocations
180 \IR{gotpc relocation} \c{GOTPC} relocations
181 \IR{intel number formats} Intel number formats
182 \IR{linux, elf} Linux, ELF
183 \IR{linux, a.out} Linux, \c{a.out}
184 \IR{linux, as86} Linux, \c{as86}
185 \IR{logical and} logical AND
186 \IR{logical or} logical OR
187 \IR{logical xor} logical XOR
188 \IR{mach object file format} Mach, object file format
190 \IR{macho32} \c{macho32}
191 \IR{macho64} \c{macho64}
194 \IA{memory reference}{memory references}
196 \IA{misc directory}{misc subdirectory}
197 \IR{misc subdirectory} \c{misc} subdirectory
198 \IR{microsoft omf} Microsoft OMF
199 \IR{mmx registers} MMX registers
200 \IA{modr/m}{modr/m byte}
201 \IR{modr/m byte} ModR/M byte
203 \IR{ms-dos device drivers} MS-DOS device drivers
204 \IR{multipush} \c{multipush} macro
206 \IR{nasm version} NASM version
210 \IR{operating system} operating system
212 \IR{pascal calling convention}Pascal calling convention
213 \IR{passes} passes, assembly
218 \IR{plt} \c{PLT} relocations
219 \IA{pre-defining macros}{pre-define}
220 \IA{preprocessor expressions}{preprocessor, expressions}
221 \IA{preprocessor loops}{preprocessor, loops}
222 \IA{preprocessor variables}{preprocessor, variables}
223 \IA{rdoff subdirectory}{rdoff}
224 \IR{rdoff} \c{rdoff} subdirectory
225 \IR{relocatable dynamic object file format} Relocatable Dynamic
227 \IR{relocations, pic-specific} relocations, PIC-specific
228 \IA{repeating}{repeating code}
229 \IR{section alignment, in elf} section alignment, in \c{elf}
230 \IR{section alignment, in bin} section alignment, in \c{bin}
231 \IR{section alignment, in obj} section alignment, in \c{obj}
232 \IR{section alignment, in win32} section alignment, in \c{win32}
233 \IR{section, elf extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{elf} extensions to
234 \IR{section, win32 extensions to} \c{SECTION}, \c{win32} extensions to
235 \IR{segment alignment, in bin} segment alignment, in \c{bin}
236 \IR{segment alignment, in obj} segment alignment, in \c{obj}
237 \IR{segment, obj extensions to} \c{SEGMENT}, \c{elf} extensions to
238 \IR{segment names, borland pascal} segment names, Borland Pascal
239 \IR{shift command} \c{shift} command
241 \IR{sib byte} SIB byte
242 \IR{align, smart} \c{ALIGN}, smart
243 \IR{solaris x86} Solaris x86
244 \IA{standard section names}{standardized section names}
245 \IR{symbols, exporting from dlls} symbols, exporting from DLLs
246 \IR{symbols, importing from dlls} symbols, importing from DLLs
247 \IR{test subdirectory} \c{test} subdirectory
249 \IR{underscore, in c symbols} underscore, in C symbols
255 \IA{sco unix}{unix, sco}
256 \IR{unix, sco} Unix, SCO
257 \IA{unix source archive}{unix, source archive}
258 \IR{unix, source archive} Unix, source archive
259 \IA{unix system v}{unix, system v}
260 \IR{unix, system v} Unix, System V
261 \IR{unixware} UnixWare
263 \IR{version number of nasm} version number of NASM
264 \IR{visual c++} Visual C++
265 \IR{www page} WWW page
269 \IR{windows 95} Windows 95
270 \IR{windows nt} Windows NT
271 \# \IC{program entry point}{entry point, program}
272 \# \IC{program entry point}{start point, program}
273 \# \IC{MS-DOS device drivers}{device drivers, MS-DOS}
274 \# \IC{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}{32-bit mode, versus 16-bit mode}
275 \# \IC{c symbol names}{symbol names, in C}
278 \C{intro} Introduction
280 \H{whatsnasm} What Is NASM?
282 The Netwide Assembler, NASM, is an 80x86 and x86-64 assembler designed
283 for portability and modularity. It supports a range of object file
284 formats, including Linux and \c{*BSD} \c{a.out}, \c{ELF}, \c{COFF},
285 \c{Mach-O}, Microsoft 16-bit \c{OBJ}, \c{Win32} and \c{Win64}. It will
286 also output plain binary files. Its syntax is designed to be simple
287 and easy to understand, similar to Intel's but less complex. It
288 supports all currently known x86 architectural extensions, and has
289 strong support for macros.
292 \S{yaasm} Why Yet Another Assembler?
294 The Netwide Assembler grew out of an idea on \i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86}
295 (or possibly \i\c{alt.lang.asm} - I forget which), which was
296 essentially that there didn't seem to be a good \e{free} x86-series
297 assembler around, and that maybe someone ought to write one.
299 \b \i\c{a86} is good, but not free, and in particular you don't get any
300 32-bit capability until you pay. It's DOS only, too.
302 \b \i\c{gas} is free, and ports over to DOS and Unix, but it's not
303 very good, since it's designed to be a back end to \i\c{gcc}, which
304 always feeds it correct code. So its error checking is minimal. Also,
305 its syntax is horrible, from the point of view of anyone trying to
306 actually \e{write} anything in it. Plus you can't write 16-bit code in
309 \b \i\c{as86} is specific to Minix and Linux, and (my version at least)
310 doesn't seem to have much (or any) documentation.
312 \b \i\c{MASM} isn't very good, and it's (was) expensive, and it runs only under
315 \b \i\c{TASM} is better, but still strives for MASM compatibility,
316 which means millions of directives and tons of red tape. And its syntax
317 is essentially MASM's, with the contradictions and quirks that
318 entails (although it sorts out some of those by means of Ideal mode.)
319 It's expensive too. And it's DOS-only.
321 So here, for your coding pleasure, is NASM. At present it's
322 still in prototype stage - we don't promise that it can outperform
323 any of these assemblers. But please, \e{please} send us bug reports,
324 fixes, helpful information, and anything else you can get your hands
325 on (and thanks to the many people who've done this already! You all
326 know who you are), and we'll improve it out of all recognition.
330 \S{legal} \i{License} Conditions
332 Please see the file \c{LICENSE}, supplied as part of any NASM
333 distribution archive, for the license conditions under which you may
334 use NASM. NASM is now under the so-called 2-clause BSD license, also
335 known as the simplified BSD license.
337 Copyright 1996-2009 the NASM Authors - All rights reserved.
339 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
340 modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are
343 \b Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
344 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
346 \b Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
347 notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
348 documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
350 THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
351 CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
352 INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
353 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
354 DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
355 CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
356 SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
357 NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
358 LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
359 HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
360 CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
361 OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
362 EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
365 \H{contact} Contact Information
367 The current version of NASM (since about 0.98.08) is maintained by a
368 team of developers, accessible through the \c{nasm-devel} mailing list
369 (see below for the link).
370 If you want to report a bug, please read \k{bugs} first.
372 NASM has a \i{website} at
373 \W{http://www.nasm.us/}\c{http://www.nasm.us/}. If it's not there,
376 \i{New releases}, \i{release candidates}, and \I{snapshots, daily
377 development}\i{daily development snapshots} of NASM are available from
378 the official web site.
380 Announcements are posted to
381 \W{news:comp.lang.asm.x86}\i\c{comp.lang.asm.x86},
383 \W{http://www.freshmeat.net/}\c{http://www.freshmeat.net/}.
385 If you want information about the current development status, please
386 subscribe to the \i\c{nasm-devel} email list; see link from the
390 \H{install} Installation
392 \S{instdos} \i{Installing} NASM under MS-\i{DOS} or Windows
394 Once you've obtained the appropriate archive for NASM,
395 \i\c{nasm-XXX-dos.zip} or \i\c{nasm-XXX-win32.zip} (where \c{XXX}
396 denotes the version number of NASM contained in the archive), unpack
397 it into its own directory (for example \c{c:\\nasm}).
399 The archive will contain a set of executable files: the NASM
400 executable file \i\c{nasm.exe}, the NDISASM executable file
401 \i\c{ndisasm.exe}, and possibly additional utilities to handle the
404 The only file NASM needs to run is its own executable, so copy
405 \c{nasm.exe} to a directory on your PATH, or alternatively edit
406 \i\c{autoexec.bat} to add the \c{nasm} directory to your
407 \i\c{PATH} (to do that under Windows XP, go to Start > Control Panel >
408 System > Advanced > Environment Variables; these instructions may work
409 under other versions of Windows as well.)
411 That's it - NASM is installed. You don't need the nasm directory
412 to be present to run NASM (unless you've added it to your \c{PATH}),
413 so you can delete it if you need to save space; however, you may
414 want to keep the documentation or test programs.
416 If you've downloaded the \i{DOS source archive}, \i\c{nasm-XXX.zip},
417 the \c{nasm} directory will also contain the full NASM \i{source
418 code}, and a selection of \i{Makefiles} you can (hopefully) use to
419 rebuild your copy of NASM from scratch. See the file \c{INSTALL} in
422 Note that a number of files are generated from other files by Perl
423 scripts. Although the NASM source distribution includes these
424 generated files, you will need to rebuild them (and hence, will need a
425 Perl interpreter) if you change insns.dat, standard.mac or the
426 documentation. It is possible future source distributions may not
427 include these files at all. Ports of \i{Perl} for a variety of
428 platforms, including DOS and Windows, are available from
429 \W{http://www.cpan.org/ports/}\i{www.cpan.org}.
432 \S{instdos} Installing NASM under \i{Unix}
434 Once you've obtained the \i{Unix source archive} for NASM,
435 \i\c{nasm-XXX.tar.gz} (where \c{XXX} denotes the version number of
436 NASM contained in the archive), unpack it into a directory such
437 as \c{/usr/local/src}. The archive, when unpacked, will create its
438 own subdirectory \c{nasm-XXX}.
440 NASM is an \I{Autoconf}\I\c{configure}auto-configuring package: once
441 you've unpacked it, \c{cd} to the directory it's been unpacked into
442 and type \c{./configure}. This shell script will find the best C
443 compiler to use for building NASM and set up \i{Makefiles}
446 Once NASM has auto-configured, you can type \i\c{make} to build the
447 \c{nasm} and \c{ndisasm} binaries, and then \c{make install} to
448 install them in \c{/usr/local/bin} and install the \i{man pages}
449 \i\c{nasm.1} and \i\c{ndisasm.1} in \c{/usr/local/man/man1}.
450 Alternatively, you can give options such as \c{--prefix} to the
451 configure script (see the file \i\c{INSTALL} for more details), or
452 install the programs yourself.
454 NASM also comes with a set of utilities for handling the \c{RDOFF}
455 custom object-file format, which are in the \i\c{rdoff} subdirectory
456 of the NASM archive. You can build these with \c{make rdf} and
457 install them with \c{make rdf_install}, if you want them.
460 \C{running} Running NASM
462 \H{syntax} NASM \i{Command-Line} Syntax
464 To assemble a file, you issue a command of the form
466 \c nasm -f <format> <filename> [-o <output>]
470 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm
472 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into an \c{ELF} object file \c{myfile.o}. And
474 \c nasm -f bin myfile.asm -o myfile.com
476 will assemble \c{myfile.asm} into a raw binary file \c{myfile.com}.
478 To produce a listing file, with the hex codes output from NASM
479 displayed on the left of the original sources, use the \c{-l} option
480 to give a listing file name, for example:
482 \c nasm -f coff myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
484 To get further usage instructions from NASM, try typing
488 As \c{-hf}, this will also list the available output file formats, and what they
491 If you use Linux but aren't sure whether your system is \c{a.out}
496 (in the directory in which you put the NASM binary when you
497 installed it). If it says something like
499 \c nasm: ELF 32-bit LSB executable i386 (386 and up) Version 1
501 then your system is \c{ELF}, and you should use the option \c{-f elf}
502 when you want NASM to produce Linux object files. If it says
504 \c nasm: Linux/i386 demand-paged executable (QMAGIC)
506 or something similar, your system is \c{a.out}, and you should use
507 \c{-f aout} instead (Linux \c{a.out} systems have long been obsolete,
508 and are rare these days.)
510 Like Unix compilers and assemblers, NASM is silent unless it
511 goes wrong: you won't see any output at all, unless it gives error
515 \S{opt-o} The \i\c{-o} Option: Specifying the Output File Name
517 NASM will normally choose the name of your output file for you;
518 precisely how it does this is dependent on the object file format.
519 For Microsoft object file formats (\c{obj}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}),
520 it will remove the \c{.asm} \i{extension} (or whatever extension you
521 like to use - NASM doesn't care) from your source file name and
522 substitute \c{.obj}. For Unix object file formats (\c{aout}, \c{as86},
523 \c{coff}, \c{elf32}, \c{elf64}, \c{ieee}, \c{macho32} and \c{macho64})
524 it will substitute \c{.o}. For \c{dbg}, \c{rdf}, \c{ith} and \c{srec},
525 it will use \c{.dbg}, \c{.rdf}, \c{.ith} and \c{.srec}, respectively,
526 and for the \c{bin} format it will simply remove the extension, so
527 that \c{myfile.asm} produces the output file \c{myfile}.
529 If the output file already exists, NASM will overwrite it, unless it
530 has the same name as the input file, in which case it will give a
531 warning and use \i\c{nasm.out} as the output file name instead.
533 For situations in which this behaviour is unacceptable, NASM
534 provides the \c{-o} command-line option, which allows you to specify
535 your desired output file name. You invoke \c{-o} by following it
536 with the name you wish for the output file, either with or without
537 an intervening space. For example:
539 \c nasm -f bin program.asm -o program.com
540 \c nasm -f bin driver.asm -odriver.sys
542 Note that this is a small o, and is different from a capital O , which
543 is used to specify the number of optimisation passes required. See \k{opt-O}.
546 \S{opt-f} The \i\c{-f} Option: Specifying the \i{Output File Format}
548 If you do not supply the \c{-f} option to NASM, it will choose an
549 output file format for you itself. In the distribution versions of
550 NASM, the default is always \i\c{bin}; if you've compiled your own
551 copy of NASM, you can redefine \i\c{OF_DEFAULT} at compile time and
552 choose what you want the default to be.
554 Like \c{-o}, the intervening space between \c{-f} and the output
555 file format is optional; so \c{-f elf} and \c{-felf} are both valid.
557 A complete list of the available output file formats can be given by
558 issuing the command \i\c{nasm -hf}.
561 \S{opt-l} The \i\c{-l} Option: Generating a \i{Listing File}
563 If you supply the \c{-l} option to NASM, followed (with the usual
564 optional space) by a file name, NASM will generate a
565 \i{source-listing file} for you, in which addresses and generated
566 code are listed on the left, and the actual source code, with
567 expansions of multi-line macros (except those which specifically
568 request no expansion in source listings: see \k{nolist}) on the
571 \c nasm -f elf myfile.asm -l myfile.lst
573 If a list file is selected, you may turn off listing for a
574 section of your source with \c{[list -]}, and turn it back on
575 with \c{[list +]}, (the default, obviously). There is no "user
576 form" (without the brackets). This can be used to list only
577 sections of interest, avoiding excessively long listings.
580 \S{opt-M} The \i\c{-M} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
582 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
583 This can be redirected to a file for further processing. For example:
585 \c nasm -M myfile.asm > myfile.dep
588 \S{opt-MG} The \i\c{-MG} Option: Generate \i{Makefile Dependencies}
590 This option can be used to generate makefile dependencies on stdout.
591 This differs from the \c{-M} option in that if a nonexisting file is
592 encountered, it is assumed to be a generated file and is added to the
593 dependency list without a prefix.
596 \S{opt-MF} The \i\c\{-MF} Option: Set Makefile Dependency File
598 This option can be used with the \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options to send the
599 output to a file, rather than to stdout. For example:
601 \c nasm -M -MF myfile.dep myfile.asm
604 \S{opt-MD} The \i\c{-MD} Option: Assemble and Generate Dependencies
606 The \c{-MD} option acts as the combination of the \c{-M} and \c{-MF}
607 options (i.e. a filename has to be specified.) However, unlike the
608 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} options, \c{-MD} does \e{not} inhibit the normal
609 operation of the assembler. Use this to automatically generate
610 updated dependencies with every assembly session. For example:
612 \c nasm -f elf -o myfile.o -MD myfile.dep myfile.asm
615 \S{opt-MT} The \i\c{-MT} Option: Dependency Target Name
617 The \c{-MT} option can be used to override the default name of the
618 dependency target. This is normally the same as the output filename,
619 specified by the \c{-o} option.
622 \S{opt-MQ} The \i\c{-MQ} Option: Dependency Target Name (Quoted)
624 The \c{-MQ} option acts as the \c{-MT} option, except it tries to
625 quote characters that have special meaning in Makefile syntax. This
626 is not foolproof, as not all characters with special meaning are
630 \S{opt-MP} The \i\c{-MP} Option: Emit phony targets
632 When used with any of the dependency generation options, the \c{-MP}
633 option causes NASM to emit a phony target without dependencies for
634 each header file. This prevents Make from complaining if a header
635 file has been removed.
638 \S{opt-F} The \i\c{-F} Option: Selecting a \i{Debug Information Format}
640 This option is used to select the format of the debug information
641 emitted into the output file, to be used by a debugger (or \e{will}
642 be). Prior to version 2.03.01, the use of this switch did \e{not} enable
643 output of the selected debug info format. Use \c{-g}, see \k{opt-g},
644 to enable output. Versions 2.03.01 and later automatically enable \c{-g}
645 if \c{-F} is specified.
647 A complete list of the available debug file formats for an output
648 format can be seen by issuing the command \c{nasm -f <format> -y}. Not
649 all output formats currently support debugging output. See \k{opt-y}.
651 This should not be confused with the \c{-f dbg} output format option which
652 is not built into NASM by default. For information on how
653 to enable it when building from the sources, see \k{dbgfmt}.
656 \S{opt-g} The \i\c{-g} Option: Enabling \i{Debug Information}.
658 This option can be used to generate debugging information in the specified
659 format. See \k{opt-F}. Using \c{-g} without \c{-F} results in emitting
660 debug info in the default format, if any, for the selected output format.
661 If no debug information is currently implemented in the selected output
662 format, \c{-g} is \e{silently ignored}.
665 \S{opt-X} The \i\c{-X} Option: Selecting an \i{Error Reporting Format}
667 This option can be used to select an error reporting format for any
668 error messages that might be produced by NASM.
670 Currently, two error reporting formats may be selected. They are
671 the \c{-Xvc} option and the \c{-Xgnu} option. The GNU format is
672 the default and looks like this:
674 \c filename.asm:65: error: specific error message
676 where \c{filename.asm} is the name of the source file in which the
677 error was detected, \c{65} is the source file line number on which
678 the error was detected, \c{error} is the severity of the error (this
679 could be \c{warning}), and \c{specific error message} is a more
680 detailed text message which should help pinpoint the exact problem.
682 The other format, specified by \c{-Xvc} is the style used by Microsoft
683 Visual C++ and some other programs. It looks like this:
685 \c filename.asm(65) : error: specific error message
687 where the only difference is that the line number is in parentheses
688 instead of being delimited by colons.
690 See also the \c{Visual C++} output format, \k{win32fmt}.
692 \S{opt-Z} The \i\c{-Z} Option: Send Errors to a File
694 Under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS} it can be difficult (though there are ways) to
695 redirect the standard-error output of a program to a file. Since
696 NASM usually produces its warning and \i{error messages} on
697 \i\c{stderr}, this can make it hard to capture the errors if (for
698 example) you want to load them into an editor.
700 NASM therefore provides the \c{-Z} option, taking a filename argument
701 which causes errors to be sent to the specified files rather than
702 standard error. Therefore you can \I{redirecting errors}redirect
703 the errors into a file by typing
705 \c nasm -Z myfile.err -f obj myfile.asm
707 In earlier versions of NASM, this option was called \c{-E}, but it was
708 changed since \c{-E} is an option conventionally used for
709 preprocessing only, with disastrous results. See \k{opt-E}.
711 \S{opt-s} The \i\c{-s} Option: Send Errors to \i\c{stdout}
713 The \c{-s} option redirects \i{error messages} to \c{stdout} rather
714 than \c{stderr}, so it can be redirected under \I{DOS}\c{MS-DOS}. To
715 assemble the file \c{myfile.asm} and pipe its output to the \c{more}
716 program, you can type:
718 \c nasm -s -f obj myfile.asm | more
720 See also the \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
723 \S{opt-i} The \i\c{-i}\I\c{-I} Option: Include File Search Directories
725 When NASM sees the \i\c{%include} or \i\c{%pathsearch} directive in a
726 source file (see \k{include}, \k{pathsearch} or \k{incbin}), it will
727 search for the given file not only in the current directory, but also
728 in any directories specified on the command line by the use of the
729 \c{-i} option. Therefore you can include files from a \i{macro
730 library}, for example, by typing
732 \c nasm -ic:\macrolib\ -f obj myfile.asm
734 (As usual, a space between \c{-i} and the path name is allowed, and
737 NASM, in the interests of complete source-code portability, does not
738 understand the file naming conventions of the OS it is running on;
739 the string you provide as an argument to the \c{-i} option will be
740 prepended exactly as written to the name of the include file.
741 Therefore the trailing backslash in the above example is necessary.
742 Under Unix, a trailing forward slash is similarly necessary.
744 (You can use this to your advantage, if you're really \i{perverse},
745 by noting that the option \c{-ifoo} will cause \c{%include "bar.i"}
746 to search for the file \c{foobar.i}...)
748 If you want to define a \e{standard} \i{include search path},
749 similar to \c{/usr/include} on Unix systems, you should place one or
750 more \c{-i} directives in the \c{NASMENV} environment variable (see
753 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
754 be specified as \c{-I}.
757 \S{opt-p} The \i\c{-p}\I\c{-P} Option: \I{pre-including files}Pre-Include a File
759 \I\c{%include}NASM allows you to specify files to be
760 \e{pre-included} into your source file, by the use of the \c{-p}
763 \c nasm myfile.asm -p myinc.inc
765 is equivalent to running \c{nasm myfile.asm} and placing the
766 directive \c{%include "myinc.inc"} at the start of the file.
768 For consistency with the \c{-I}, \c{-D} and \c{-U} options, this
769 option can also be specified as \c{-P}.
772 \S{opt-d} The \i\c{-d}\I\c{-D} Option: \I{pre-defining macros}Pre-Define a Macro
774 \I\c{%define}Just as the \c{-p} option gives an alternative to placing
775 \c{%include} directives at the start of a source file, the \c{-d}
776 option gives an alternative to placing a \c{%define} directive. You
779 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100
781 as an alternative to placing the directive
785 at the start of the file. You can miss off the macro value, as well:
786 the option \c{-dFOO} is equivalent to coding \c{%define FOO}. This
787 form of the directive may be useful for selecting \i{assembly-time
788 options} which are then tested using \c{%ifdef}, for example
791 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
792 be specified as \c{-D}.
795 \S{opt-u} The \i\c{-u}\I\c{-U} Option: \I{Undefining macros}Undefine a Macro
797 \I\c{%undef}The \c{-u} option undefines a macro that would otherwise
798 have been pre-defined, either automatically or by a \c{-p} or \c{-d}
799 option specified earlier on the command lines.
801 For example, the following command line:
803 \c nasm myfile.asm -dFOO=100 -uFOO
805 would result in \c{FOO} \e{not} being a predefined macro in the
806 program. This is useful to override options specified at a different
809 For Makefile compatibility with many C compilers, this option can also
810 be specified as \c{-U}.
813 \S{opt-E} The \i\c{-E}\I{-e} Option: Preprocess Only
815 NASM allows the \i{preprocessor} to be run on its own, up to a
816 point. Using the \c{-E} option (which requires no arguments) will
817 cause NASM to preprocess its input file, expand all the macro
818 references, remove all the comments and preprocessor directives, and
819 print the resulting file on standard output (or save it to a file,
820 if the \c{-o} option is also used).
822 This option cannot be applied to programs which require the
823 preprocessor to evaluate \I{preprocessor expressions}\i{expressions}
824 which depend on the values of symbols: so code such as
826 \c %assign tablesize ($-tablestart)
828 will cause an error in \i{preprocess-only mode}.
830 For compatiblity with older version of NASM, this option can also be
831 written \c{-e}. \c{-E} in older versions of NASM was the equivalent
832 of the current \c{-Z} option, \k{opt-Z}.
834 \S{opt-a} The \i\c{-a} Option: Don't Preprocess At All
836 If NASM is being used as the back end to a compiler, it might be
837 desirable to \I{suppressing preprocessing}suppress preprocessing
838 completely and assume the compiler has already done it, to save time
839 and increase compilation speeds. The \c{-a} option, requiring no
840 argument, instructs NASM to replace its powerful \i{preprocessor}
841 with a \i{stub preprocessor} which does nothing.
844 \S{opt-O} The \i\c{-O} Option: Specifying \i{Multipass Optimization}
846 NASM defaults to not optimizing operands which can fit into a signed byte.
847 This means that if you want the shortest possible object code,
848 you have to enable optimization.
850 Using the \c{-O} option, you can tell NASM to carry out different
851 levels of optimization. The syntax is:
853 \b \c{-O0}: No optimization. All operands take their long forms,
854 if a short form is not specified, except conditional jumps.
855 This is intended to match NASM 0.98 behavior.
857 \b \c{-O1}: Minimal optimization. As above, but immediate operands
858 which will fit in a signed byte are optimized,
859 unless the long form is specified. Conditional jumps default
860 to the long form unless otherwise specified.
862 \b \c{-Ox} (where \c{x} is the actual letter \c{x}): Multipass optimization.
863 Minimize branch offsets and signed immediate bytes,
864 overriding size specification unless the \c{strict} keyword
865 has been used (see \k{strict}). For compatability with earlier
866 releases, the letter \c{x} may also be any number greater than
867 one. This number has no effect on the actual number of passes.
869 The \c{-Ox} mode is recommended for most uses.
871 Note that this is a capital \c{O}, and is different from a small \c{o}, which
872 is used to specify the output file name. See \k{opt-o}.
875 \S{opt-t} The \i\c{-t} Option: Enable TASM Compatibility Mode
877 NASM includes a limited form of compatibility with Borland's \i\c{TASM}.
878 When NASM's \c{-t} option is used, the following changes are made:
880 \b local labels may be prefixed with \c{@@} instead of \c{.}
882 \b size override is supported within brackets. In TASM compatible mode,
883 a size override inside square brackets changes the size of the operand,
884 and not the address type of the operand as it does in NASM syntax. E.g.
885 \c{mov eax,[DWORD val]} is valid syntax in TASM compatibility mode.
886 Note that you lose the ability to override the default address type for
889 \b unprefixed forms of some directives supported (\c{arg}, \c{elif},
890 \c{else}, \c{endif}, \c{if}, \c{ifdef}, \c{ifdifi}, \c{ifndef},
891 \c{include}, \c{local})
893 \S{opt-w} The \i\c{-w} and \i\c{-W} Options: Enable or Disable Assembly \i{Warnings}
895 NASM can observe many conditions during the course of assembly which
896 are worth mentioning to the user, but not a sufficiently severe
897 error to justify NASM refusing to generate an output file. These
898 conditions are reported like errors, but come up with the word
899 `warning' before the message. Warnings do not prevent NASM from
900 generating an output file and returning a success status to the
903 Some conditions are even less severe than that: they are only
904 sometimes worth mentioning to the user. Therefore NASM supports the
905 \c{-w} command-line option, which enables or disables certain
906 classes of assembly warning. Such warning classes are described by a
907 name, for example \c{orphan-labels}; you can enable warnings of
908 this class by the command-line option \c{-w+orphan-labels} and
909 disable it by \c{-w-orphan-labels}.
911 The \i{suppressible warning} classes are:
913 \b \i\c{macro-params} covers warnings about \i{multi-line macros}
914 being invoked with the wrong number of parameters. This warning
915 class is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacover} for an example of why
916 you might want to disable it.
918 \b \i\c{macro-selfref} warns if a macro references itself. This
919 warning class is disabled by default.
921 \b\i\c{macro-defaults} warns when a macro has more default
922 parameters than optional parameters. This warning class
923 is enabled by default; see \k{mlmacdef} for why you might want to disable it.
925 \b \i\c{orphan-labels} covers warnings about source lines which
926 contain no instruction but define a label without a trailing colon.
927 NASM warns about this somewhat obscure condition by default;
928 see \k{syntax} for more information.
930 \b \i\c{number-overflow} covers warnings about numeric constants which
931 don't fit in 64 bits. This warning class is enabled by default.
933 \b \i\c{gnu-elf-extensions} warns if 8-bit or 16-bit relocations
934 are used in \c{-f elf} format. The GNU extensions allow this.
935 This warning class is disabled by default.
937 \b \i\c{float-overflow} warns about floating point overflow.
940 \b \i\c{float-denorm} warns about floating point denormals.
943 \b \i\c{float-underflow} warns about floating point underflow.
946 \b \i\c{float-toolong} warns about too many digits in floating-point numbers.
949 \b \i\c{user} controls \c{%warning} directives (see \k{pperror}).
952 \b \i\c{error} causes warnings to be treated as errors. Disabled by
955 \b \i\c{all} is an alias for \e{all} suppressible warning classes (not
956 including \c{error}). Thus, \c{-w+all} enables all available warnings.
958 In addition, you can set warning classes across sections.
959 Warning classes may be enabled with \i\c{[warning +warning-name]},
960 disabled with \i\c{[warning -warning-name]} or reset to their
961 original value with \i\c{[warning *warning-name]}. No "user form"
962 (without the brackets) exists.
964 Since version 2.00, NASM has also supported the gcc-like syntax
965 \c{-Wwarning} and \c{-Wno-warning} instead of \c{-w+warning} and
966 \c{-w-warning}, respectively.
969 \S{opt-v} The \i\c{-v} Option: Display \i{Version} Info
971 Typing \c{NASM -v} will display the version of NASM which you are using,
972 and the date on which it was compiled.
974 You will need the version number if you report a bug.
976 \S{opt-y} The \i\c{-y} Option: Display Available Debug Info Formats
978 Typing \c{nasm -f <option> -y} will display a list of the available
979 debug info formats for the given output format. The default format
980 is indicated by an asterisk. For example:
984 \c valid debug formats for 'elf32' output format are
985 \c ('*' denotes default):
986 \c * stabs ELF32 (i386) stabs debug format for Linux
987 \c dwarf elf32 (i386) dwarf debug format for Linux
990 \S{opt-pfix} The \i\c{--prefix} and \i\c{--postfix} Options.
992 The \c{--prefix} and \c{--postfix} options prepend or append
993 (respectively) the given argument to all \c{global} or
994 \c{extern} variables. E.g. \c{--prefix _} will prepend the
995 underscore to all global and external variables, as C sometimes
996 (but not always) likes it.
999 \S{nasmenv} The \i\c{NASMENV} \i{Environment} Variable
1001 If you define an environment variable called \c{NASMENV}, the program
1002 will interpret it as a list of extra command-line options, which are
1003 processed before the real command line. You can use this to define
1004 standard search directories for include files, by putting \c{-i}
1005 options in the \c{NASMENV} variable.
1007 The value of the variable is split up at white space, so that the
1008 value \c{-s -ic:\\nasmlib} will be treated as two separate options.
1009 However, that means that the value \c{-dNAME="my name"} won't do
1010 what you might want, because it will be split at the space and the
1011 NASM command-line processing will get confused by the two
1012 nonsensical words \c{-dNAME="my} and \c{name"}.
1014 To get round this, NASM provides a feature whereby, if you begin the
1015 \c{NASMENV} environment variable with some character that isn't a minus
1016 sign, then NASM will treat this character as the \i{separator
1017 character} for options. So setting the \c{NASMENV} variable to the
1018 value \c{!-s!-ic:\\nasmlib} is equivalent to setting it to \c{-s
1019 -ic:\\nasmlib}, but \c{!-dNAME="my name"} will work.
1021 This environment variable was previously called \c{NASM}. This was
1022 changed with version 0.98.31.
1025 \H{qstart} \i{Quick Start} for \i{MASM} Users
1027 If you're used to writing programs with MASM, or with \i{TASM} in
1028 MASM-compatible (non-Ideal) mode, or with \i\c{a86}, this section
1029 attempts to outline the major differences between MASM's syntax and
1030 NASM's. If you're not already used to MASM, it's probably worth
1031 skipping this section.
1034 \S{qscs} NASM Is \I{case sensitivity}Case-Sensitive
1036 One simple difference is that NASM is case-sensitive. It makes a
1037 difference whether you call your label \c{foo}, \c{Foo} or \c{FOO}.
1038 If you're assembling to \c{DOS} or \c{OS/2} \c{.OBJ} files, you can
1039 invoke the \i\c{UPPERCASE} directive (documented in \k{objfmt}) to
1040 ensure that all symbols exported to other code modules are forced
1041 to be upper case; but even then, \e{within} a single module, NASM
1042 will distinguish between labels differing only in case.
1045 \S{qsbrackets} NASM Requires \i{Square Brackets} For \i{Memory References}
1047 NASM was designed with simplicity of syntax in mind. One of the
1048 \i{design goals} of NASM is that it should be possible, as far as is
1049 practical, for the user to look at a single line of NASM code
1050 and tell what opcode is generated by it. You can't do this in MASM:
1051 if you declare, for example,
1056 then the two lines of code
1061 generate completely different opcodes, despite having
1062 identical-looking syntaxes.
1064 NASM avoids this undesirable situation by having a much simpler
1065 syntax for memory references. The rule is simply that any access to
1066 the \e{contents} of a memory location requires square brackets
1067 around the address, and any access to the \e{address} of a variable
1068 doesn't. So an instruction of the form \c{mov ax,foo} will
1069 \e{always} refer to a compile-time constant, whether it's an \c{EQU}
1070 or the address of a variable; and to access the \e{contents} of the
1071 variable \c{bar}, you must code \c{mov ax,[bar]}.
1073 This also means that NASM has no need for MASM's \i\c{OFFSET}
1074 keyword, since the MASM code \c{mov ax,offset bar} means exactly the
1075 same thing as NASM's \c{mov ax,bar}. If you're trying to get
1076 large amounts of MASM code to assemble sensibly under NASM, you
1077 can always code \c{%idefine offset} to make the preprocessor treat
1078 the \c{OFFSET} keyword as a no-op.
1080 This issue is even more confusing in \i\c{a86}, where declaring a
1081 label with a trailing colon defines it to be a `label' as opposed to
1082 a `variable' and causes \c{a86} to adopt NASM-style semantics; so in
1083 \c{a86}, \c{mov ax,var} has different behaviour depending on whether
1084 \c{var} was declared as \c{var: dw 0} (a label) or \c{var dw 0} (a
1085 word-size variable). NASM is very simple by comparison:
1086 \e{everything} is a label.
1088 NASM, in the interests of simplicity, also does not support the
1089 \i{hybrid syntaxes} supported by MASM and its clones, such as
1090 \c{mov ax,table[bx]}, where a memory reference is denoted by one
1091 portion outside square brackets and another portion inside. The
1092 correct syntax for the above is \c{mov ax,[table+bx]}. Likewise,
1093 \c{mov ax,es:[di]} is wrong and \c{mov ax,[es:di]} is right.
1096 \S{qstypes} NASM Doesn't Store \i{Variable Types}
1098 NASM, by design, chooses not to remember the types of variables you
1099 declare. Whereas MASM will remember, on seeing \c{var dw 0}, that
1100 you declared \c{var} as a word-size variable, and will then be able
1101 to fill in the \i{ambiguity} in the size of the instruction \c{mov
1102 var,2}, NASM will deliberately remember nothing about the symbol
1103 \c{var} except where it begins, and so you must explicitly code
1104 \c{mov word [var],2}.
1106 For this reason, NASM doesn't support the \c{LODS}, \c{MOVS},
1107 \c{STOS}, \c{SCAS}, \c{CMPS}, \c{INS}, or \c{OUTS} instructions,
1108 but only supports the forms such as \c{LODSB}, \c{MOVSW}, and
1109 \c{SCASD}, which explicitly specify the size of the components of
1110 the strings being manipulated.
1113 \S{qsassume} NASM Doesn't \i\c{ASSUME}
1115 As part of NASM's drive for simplicity, it also does not support the
1116 \c{ASSUME} directive. NASM will not keep track of what values you
1117 choose to put in your segment registers, and will never
1118 \e{automatically} generate a \i{segment override} prefix.
1121 \S{qsmodel} NASM Doesn't Support \i{Memory Models}
1123 NASM also does not have any directives to support different 16-bit
1124 memory models. The programmer has to keep track of which functions
1125 are supposed to be called with a \i{far call} and which with a
1126 \i{near call}, and is responsible for putting the correct form of
1127 \c{RET} instruction (\c{RETN} or \c{RETF}; NASM accepts \c{RET}
1128 itself as an alternate form for \c{RETN}); in addition, the
1129 programmer is responsible for coding CALL FAR instructions where
1130 necessary when calling \e{external} functions, and must also keep
1131 track of which external variable definitions are far and which are
1135 \S{qsfpu} \i{Floating-Point} Differences
1137 NASM uses different names to refer to floating-point registers from
1138 MASM: where MASM would call them \c{ST(0)}, \c{ST(1)} and so on, and
1139 \i\c{a86} would call them simply \c{0}, \c{1} and so on, NASM
1140 chooses to call them \c{st0}, \c{st1} etc.
1142 As of version 0.96, NASM now treats the instructions with
1143 \i{`nowait'} forms in the same way as MASM-compatible assemblers.
1144 The idiosyncratic treatment employed by 0.95 and earlier was based
1145 on a misunderstanding by the authors.
1148 \S{qsother} Other Differences
1150 For historical reasons, NASM uses the keyword \i\c{TWORD} where MASM
1151 and compatible assemblers use \i\c{TBYTE}.
1153 NASM does not declare \i{uninitialized storage} in the same way as
1154 MASM: where a MASM programmer might use \c{stack db 64 dup (?)},
1155 NASM requires \c{stack resb 64}, intended to be read as `reserve 64
1156 bytes'. For a limited amount of compatibility, since NASM treats
1157 \c{?} as a valid character in symbol names, you can code \c{? equ 0}
1158 and then writing \c{dw ?} will at least do something vaguely useful.
1159 \I\c{RESB}\i\c{DUP} is still not a supported syntax, however.
1161 In addition to all of this, macros and directives work completely
1162 differently to MASM. See \k{preproc} and \k{directive} for further
1166 \C{lang} The NASM Language
1168 \H{syntax} Layout of a NASM Source Line
1170 Like most assemblers, each NASM source line contains (unless it
1171 is a macro, a preprocessor directive or an assembler directive: see
1172 \k{preproc} and \k{directive}) some combination of the four fields
1174 \c label: instruction operands ; comment
1176 As usual, most of these fields are optional; the presence or absence
1177 of any combination of a label, an instruction and a comment is allowed.
1178 Of course, the operand field is either required or forbidden by the
1179 presence and nature of the instruction field.
1181 NASM uses backslash (\\) as the line continuation character; if a line
1182 ends with backslash, the next line is considered to be a part of the
1183 backslash-ended line.
1185 NASM places no restrictions on white space within a line: labels may
1186 have white space before them, or instructions may have no space
1187 before them, or anything. The \i{colon} after a label is also
1188 optional. (Note that this means that if you intend to code \c{lodsb}
1189 alone on a line, and type \c{lodab} by accident, then that's still a
1190 valid source line which does nothing but define a label. Running
1191 NASM with the command-line option
1192 \I{orphan-labels}\c{-w+orphan-labels} will cause it to warn you if
1193 you define a label alone on a line without a \i{trailing colon}.)
1195 \i{Valid characters} in labels are letters, numbers, \c{_}, \c{$},
1196 \c{#}, \c{@}, \c{~}, \c{.}, and \c{?}. The only characters which may
1197 be used as the \e{first} character of an identifier are letters,
1198 \c{.} (with special meaning: see \k{locallab}), \c{_} and \c{?}.
1199 An identifier may also be prefixed with a \I{$, prefix}\c{$} to
1200 indicate that it is intended to be read as an identifier and not a
1201 reserved word; thus, if some other module you are linking with
1202 defines a symbol called \c{eax}, you can refer to \c{$eax} in NASM
1203 code to distinguish the symbol from the register. Maximum length of
1204 an identifier is 4095 characters.
1206 The instruction field may contain any machine instruction: Pentium
1207 and P6 instructions, FPU instructions, MMX instructions and even
1208 undocumented instructions are all supported. The instruction may be
1209 prefixed by \c{LOCK}, \c{REP}, \c{REPE}/\c{REPZ} or
1210 \c{REPNE}/\c{REPNZ}, in the usual way. Explicit \I{address-size
1211 prefixes}address-size and \i{operand-size prefixes} \i\c{A16},
1212 \i\c{A32}, \i\c{A64}, \i\c{O16} and \i\c{O32}, \i\c{O64} are provided - one example of their use
1213 is given in \k{mixsize}. You can also use the name of a \I{segment
1214 override}segment register as an instruction prefix: coding
1215 \c{es mov [bx],ax} is equivalent to coding \c{mov [es:bx],ax}. We
1216 recommend the latter syntax, since it is consistent with other
1217 syntactic features of the language, but for instructions such as
1218 \c{LODSB}, which has no operands and yet can require a segment
1219 override, there is no clean syntactic way to proceed apart from
1222 An instruction is not required to use a prefix: prefixes such as
1223 \c{CS}, \c{A32}, \c{LOCK} or \c{REPE} can appear on a line by
1224 themselves, and NASM will just generate the prefix bytes.
1226 In addition to actual machine instructions, NASM also supports a
1227 number of pseudo-instructions, described in \k{pseudop}.
1229 Instruction \i{operands} may take a number of forms: they can be
1230 registers, described simply by the register name (e.g. \c{ax},
1231 \c{bp}, \c{ebx}, \c{cr0}: NASM does not use the \c{gas}-style
1232 syntax in which register names must be prefixed by a \c{%} sign), or
1233 they can be \i{effective addresses} (see \k{effaddr}), constants
1234 (\k{const}) or expressions (\k{expr}).
1236 For x87 \i{floating-point} instructions, NASM accepts a wide range of
1237 syntaxes: you can use two-operand forms like MASM supports, or you
1238 can use NASM's native single-operand forms in most cases.
1240 \# all forms of each supported instruction are given in
1242 For example, you can code:
1244 \c fadd st1 ; this sets st0 := st0 + st1
1245 \c fadd st0,st1 ; so does this
1247 \c fadd st1,st0 ; this sets st1 := st1 + st0
1248 \c fadd to st1 ; so does this
1250 Almost any x87 floating-point instruction that references memory must
1251 use one of the prefixes \i\c{DWORD}, \i\c{QWORD} or \i\c{TWORD} to
1252 indicate what size of \i{memory operand} it refers to.
1255 \H{pseudop} \i{Pseudo-Instructions}
1257 Pseudo-instructions are things which, though not real x86 machine
1258 instructions, are used in the instruction field anyway because that's
1259 the most convenient place to put them. The current pseudo-instructions
1260 are \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1261 \i\c{DY}; their \i{uninitialized} counterparts \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW},
1262 \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO} and \i\c{RESY}; the
1263 \i\c{INCBIN} command, the \i\c{EQU} command, and the \i\c{TIMES}
1267 \S{db} \c{DB} and Friends: Declaring Initialized Data
1269 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, \i\c{DO} and
1270 \i\c{DY} are used, much as in MASM, to declare initialized data in the
1271 output file. They can be invoked in a wide range of ways:
1272 \I{floating-point}\I{character constant}\I{string constant}
1274 \c db 0x55 ; just the byte 0x55
1275 \c db 0x55,0x56,0x57 ; three bytes in succession
1276 \c db 'a',0x55 ; character constants are OK
1277 \c db 'hello',13,10,'$' ; so are string constants
1278 \c dw 0x1234 ; 0x34 0x12
1279 \c dw 'a' ; 0x61 0x00 (it's just a number)
1280 \c dw 'ab' ; 0x61 0x62 (character constant)
1281 \c dw 'abc' ; 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x00 (string)
1282 \c dd 0x12345678 ; 0x78 0x56 0x34 0x12
1283 \c dd 1.234567e20 ; floating-point constant
1284 \c dq 0x123456789abcdef0 ; eight byte constant
1285 \c dq 1.234567e20 ; double-precision float
1286 \c dt 1.234567e20 ; extended-precision float
1288 \c{DT}, \c{DO} and \c{DY} do not accept \i{numeric constants} as operands.
1291 \S{resb} \c{RESB} and Friends: Declaring \i{Uninitialized} Data
1293 \i\c{RESB}, \i\c{RESW}, \i\c{RESD}, \i\c{RESQ}, \i\c{REST}, \i\c{RESO}
1294 and \i\c{RESY} are designed to be used in the BSS section of a module:
1295 they declare \e{uninitialized} storage space. Each takes a single
1296 operand, which is the number of bytes, words, doublewords or whatever
1297 to reserve. As stated in \k{qsother}, NASM does not support the
1298 MASM/TASM syntax of reserving uninitialized space by writing
1299 \I\c{?}\c{DW ?} or similar things: this is what it does instead. The
1300 operand to a \c{RESB}-type pseudo-instruction is a \i\e{critical
1301 expression}: see \k{crit}.
1305 \c buffer: resb 64 ; reserve 64 bytes
1306 \c wordvar: resw 1 ; reserve a word
1307 \c realarray resq 10 ; array of ten reals
1308 \c ymmval: resy 1 ; one YMM register
1310 \S{incbin} \i\c{INCBIN}: Including External \i{Binary Files}
1312 \c{INCBIN} is borrowed from the old Amiga assembler \i{DevPac}: it
1313 includes a binary file verbatim into the output file. This can be
1314 handy for (for example) including \i{graphics} and \i{sound} data
1315 directly into a game executable file. It can be called in one of
1318 \c incbin "file.dat" ; include the whole file
1319 \c incbin "file.dat",1024 ; skip the first 1024 bytes
1320 \c incbin "file.dat",1024,512 ; skip the first 1024, and
1321 \c ; actually include at most 512
1323 \c{INCBIN} is both a directive and a standard macro; the standard
1324 macro version searches for the file in the include file search path
1325 and adds the file to the dependency lists. This macro can be
1326 overridden if desired.
1329 \S{equ} \i\c{EQU}: Defining Constants
1331 \c{EQU} defines a symbol to a given constant value: when \c{EQU} is
1332 used, the source line must contain a label. The action of \c{EQU} is
1333 to define the given label name to the value of its (only) operand.
1334 This definition is absolute, and cannot change later. So, for
1337 \c message db 'hello, world'
1338 \c msglen equ $-message
1340 defines \c{msglen} to be the constant 12. \c{msglen} may not then be
1341 redefined later. This is not a \i{preprocessor} definition either:
1342 the value of \c{msglen} is evaluated \e{once}, using the value of
1343 \c{$} (see \k{expr} for an explanation of \c{$}) at the point of
1344 definition, rather than being evaluated wherever it is referenced
1345 and using the value of \c{$} at the point of reference.
1348 \S{times} \i\c{TIMES}: \i{Repeating} Instructions or Data
1350 The \c{TIMES} prefix causes the instruction to be assembled multiple
1351 times. This is partly present as NASM's equivalent of the \i\c{DUP}
1352 syntax supported by \i{MASM}-compatible assemblers, in that you can
1355 \c zerobuf: times 64 db 0
1357 or similar things; but \c{TIMES} is more versatile than that. The
1358 argument to \c{TIMES} is not just a numeric constant, but a numeric
1359 \e{expression}, so you can do things like
1361 \c buffer: db 'hello, world'
1362 \c times 64-$+buffer db ' '
1364 which will store exactly enough spaces to make the total length of
1365 \c{buffer} up to 64. Finally, \c{TIMES} can be applied to ordinary
1366 instructions, so you can code trivial \i{unrolled loops} in it:
1370 Note that there is no effective difference between \c{times 100 resb
1371 1} and \c{resb 100}, except that the latter will be assembled about
1372 100 times faster due to the internal structure of the assembler.
1374 The operand to \c{TIMES} is a critical expression (\k{crit}).
1376 Note also that \c{TIMES} can't be applied to \i{macros}: the reason
1377 for this is that \c{TIMES} is processed after the macro phase, which
1378 allows the argument to \c{TIMES} to contain expressions such as
1379 \c{64-$+buffer} as above. To repeat more than one line of code, or a
1380 complex macro, use the preprocessor \i\c{%rep} directive.
1383 \H{effaddr} Effective Addresses
1385 An \i{effective address} is any operand to an instruction which
1386 \I{memory reference}references memory. Effective addresses, in NASM,
1387 have a very simple syntax: they consist of an expression evaluating
1388 to the desired address, enclosed in \i{square brackets}. For
1393 \c mov ax,[wordvar+1]
1394 \c mov ax,[es:wordvar+bx]
1396 Anything not conforming to this simple system is not a valid memory
1397 reference in NASM, for example \c{es:wordvar[bx]}.
1399 More complicated effective addresses, such as those involving more
1400 than one register, work in exactly the same way:
1402 \c mov eax,[ebx*2+ecx+offset]
1405 NASM is capable of doing \i{algebra} on these effective addresses,
1406 so that things which don't necessarily \e{look} legal are perfectly
1409 \c mov eax,[ebx*5] ; assembles as [ebx*4+ebx]
1410 \c mov eax,[label1*2-label2] ; ie [label1+(label1-label2)]
1412 Some forms of effective address have more than one assembled form;
1413 in most such cases NASM will generate the smallest form it can. For
1414 example, there are distinct assembled forms for the 32-bit effective
1415 addresses \c{[eax*2+0]} and \c{[eax+eax]}, and NASM will generally
1416 generate the latter on the grounds that the former requires four
1417 bytes to store a zero offset.
1419 NASM has a hinting mechanism which will cause \c{[eax+ebx]} and
1420 \c{[ebx+eax]} to generate different opcodes; this is occasionally
1421 useful because \c{[esi+ebp]} and \c{[ebp+esi]} have different
1422 default segment registers.
1424 However, you can force NASM to generate an effective address in a
1425 particular form by the use of the keywords \c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1426 \c{DWORD} and \c{NOSPLIT}. If you need \c{[eax+3]} to be assembled
1427 using a double-word offset field instead of the one byte NASM will
1428 normally generate, you can code \c{[dword eax+3]}. Similarly, you
1429 can force NASM to use a byte offset for a small value which it
1430 hasn't seen on the first pass (see \k{crit} for an example of such a
1431 code fragment) by using \c{[byte eax+offset]}. As special cases,
1432 \c{[byte eax]} will code \c{[eax+0]} with a byte offset of zero, and
1433 \c{[dword eax]} will code it with a double-word offset of zero. The
1434 normal form, \c{[eax]}, will be coded with no offset field.
1436 The form described in the previous paragraph is also useful if you
1437 are trying to access data in a 32-bit segment from within 16 bit code.
1438 For more information on this see the section on mixed-size addressing
1439 (\k{mixaddr}). In particular, if you need to access data with a known
1440 offset that is larger than will fit in a 16-bit value, if you don't
1441 specify that it is a dword offset, nasm will cause the high word of
1442 the offset to be lost.
1444 Similarly, NASM will split \c{[eax*2]} into \c{[eax+eax]} because
1445 that allows the offset field to be absent and space to be saved; in
1446 fact, it will also split \c{[eax*2+offset]} into
1447 \c{[eax+eax+offset]}. You can combat this behaviour by the use of
1448 the \c{NOSPLIT} keyword: \c{[nosplit eax*2]} will force
1449 \c{[eax*2+0]} to be generated literally.
1451 In 64-bit mode, NASM will by default generate absolute addresses. The
1452 \i\c{REL} keyword makes it produce \c{RIP}-relative addresses. Since
1453 this is frequently the normally desired behaviour, see the \c{DEFAULT}
1454 directive (\k{default}). The keyword \i\c{ABS} overrides \i\c{REL}.
1457 \H{const} \i{Constants}
1459 NASM understands four different types of constant: numeric,
1460 character, string and floating-point.
1463 \S{numconst} \i{Numeric Constants}
1465 A numeric constant is simply a number. NASM allows you to specify
1466 numbers in a variety of number bases, in a variety of ways: you can
1467 suffix \c{H} or \c{X}, \c{Q} or \c{O}, and \c{B} for \i{hexadecimal},
1468 \i{octal} and \i{binary} respectively, or you can prefix \c{0x} for
1469 hexadecimal in the style of C, or you can prefix \c{$} for hexadecimal
1470 in the style of Borland Pascal. Note, though, that the \I{$,
1471 prefix}\c{$} prefix does double duty as a prefix on identifiers (see
1472 \k{syntax}), so a hex number prefixed with a \c{$} sign must have a
1473 digit after the \c{$} rather than a letter. In addition, current
1474 versions of NASM accept the prefix \c{0h} for hexadecimal, \c{0o} or
1475 \c{0q} for octal, and \c{0b} for binary. Please note that unlike C, a
1476 \c{0} prefix by itself does \e{not} imply an octal constant!
1478 Numeric constants can have underscores (\c{_}) interspersed to break
1481 Some examples (all producing exactly the same code):
1483 \c mov ax,200 ; decimal
1484 \c mov ax,0200 ; still decimal
1485 \c mov ax,0200d ; explicitly decimal
1486 \c mov ax,0d200 ; also decimal
1487 \c mov ax,0c8h ; hex
1488 \c mov ax,$0c8 ; hex again: the 0 is required
1489 \c mov ax,0xc8 ; hex yet again
1490 \c mov ax,0hc8 ; still hex
1491 \c mov ax,310q ; octal
1492 \c mov ax,310o ; octal again
1493 \c mov ax,0o310 ; octal yet again
1494 \c mov ax,0q310 ; hex yet again
1495 \c mov ax,11001000b ; binary
1496 \c mov ax,1100_1000b ; same binary constant
1497 \c mov ax,0b1100_1000 ; same binary constant yet again
1499 \S{strings} \I{Strings}\i{Character Strings}
1501 A character string consists of up to eight characters enclosed in
1502 either single quotes (\c{'...'}), double quotes (\c{"..."}) or
1503 backquotes (\c{`...`}). Single or double quotes are equivalent to
1504 NASM (except of course that surrounding the constant with single
1505 quotes allows double quotes to appear within it and vice versa); the
1506 contents of those are represented verbatim. Strings enclosed in
1507 backquotes support C-style \c{\\}-escapes for special characters.
1510 The following \i{escape sequences} are recognized by backquoted strings:
1512 \c \' single quote (')
1513 \c \" double quote (")
1515 \c \\\ backslash (\)
1516 \c \? question mark (?)
1524 \c \e ESC (ASCII 27)
1525 \c \377 Up to 3 octal digits - literal byte
1526 \c \xFF Up to 2 hexadecimal digits - literal byte
1527 \c \u1234 4 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1528 \c \U12345678 8 hexadecimal digits - Unicode character
1530 All other escape sequences are reserved. Note that \c{\\0}, meaning a
1531 \c{NUL} character (ASCII 0), is a special case of the octal escape
1534 \i{Unicode} characters specified with \c{\\u} or \c{\\U} are converted to
1535 \i{UTF-8}. For example, the following lines are all equivalent:
1537 \c db `\u263a` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1538 \c db `\xe2\x98\xba` ; UTF-8 smiley face
1539 \c db 0E2h, 098h, 0BAh ; UTF-8 smiley face
1542 \S{chrconst} \i{Character Constants}
1544 A character constant consists of a string up to eight bytes long, used
1545 in an expression context. It is treated as if it was an integer.
1547 A character constant with more than one byte will be arranged
1548 with \i{little-endian} order in mind: if you code
1552 then the constant generated is not \c{0x61626364}, but
1553 \c{0x64636261}, so that if you were then to store the value into
1554 memory, it would read \c{abcd} rather than \c{dcba}. This is also
1555 the sense of character constants understood by the Pentium's
1556 \i\c{CPUID} instruction.
1559 \S{strconst} \i{String Constants}
1561 String constants are character strings used in the context of some
1562 pseudo-instructions, namely the
1563 \I\c{DW}\I\c{DD}\I\c{DQ}\I\c{DT}\I\c{DO}\I\c{DY}\i\c{DB} family and
1564 \i\c{INCBIN} (where it represents a filename.) They are also used in
1565 certain preprocessor directives.
1567 A string constant looks like a character constant, only longer. It
1568 is treated as a concatenation of maximum-size character constants
1569 for the conditions. So the following are equivalent:
1571 \c db 'hello' ; string constant
1572 \c db 'h','e','l','l','o' ; equivalent character constants
1574 And the following are also equivalent:
1576 \c dd 'ninechars' ; doubleword string constant
1577 \c dd 'nine','char','s' ; becomes three doublewords
1578 \c db 'ninechars',0,0,0 ; and really looks like this
1580 Note that when used in a string-supporting context, quoted strings are
1581 treated as a string constants even if they are short enough to be a
1582 character constant, because otherwise \c{db 'ab'} would have the same
1583 effect as \c{db 'a'}, which would be silly. Similarly, three-character
1584 or four-character constants are treated as strings when they are
1585 operands to \c{DW}, and so forth.
1587 \S{unicode} \I{UTF-16}\I{UTF-32}\i{Unicode} Strings
1589 The special operators \i\c{__utf16__} and \i\c{__utf32__} allows
1590 definition of Unicode strings. They take a string in UTF-8 format and
1591 converts it to (littleendian) UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.
1595 \c %define u(x) __utf16__(x)
1596 \c %define w(x) __utf32__(x)
1598 \c dw u('C:\WINDOWS'), 0 ; Pathname in UTF-16
1599 \c dd w(`A + B = \u206a`), 0 ; String in UTF-32
1601 \c{__utf16__} and \c{__utf32__} can be applied either to strings
1602 passed to the \c{DB} family instructions, or to character constants in
1603 an expression context.
1605 \S{fltconst} \I{floating-point, constants}Floating-Point Constants
1607 \i{Floating-point} constants are acceptable only as arguments to
1608 \i\c{DB}, \i\c{DW}, \i\c{DD}, \i\c{DQ}, \i\c{DT}, and \i\c{DO}, or as
1609 arguments to the special operators \i\c{__float8__},
1610 \i\c{__float16__}, \i\c{__float32__}, \i\c{__float64__},
1611 \i\c{__float80m__}, \i\c{__float80e__}, \i\c{__float128l__}, and
1612 \i\c{__float128h__}.
1614 Floating-point constants are expressed in the traditional form:
1615 digits, then a period, then optionally more digits, then optionally an
1616 \c{E} followed by an exponent. The period is mandatory, so that NASM
1617 can distinguish between \c{dd 1}, which declares an integer constant,
1618 and \c{dd 1.0} which declares a floating-point constant. NASM also
1619 support C99-style hexadecimal floating-point: \c{0x}, hexadecimal
1620 digits, period, optionally more hexadeximal digits, then optionally a
1621 \c{P} followed by a \e{binary} (not hexadecimal) exponent in decimal
1624 Underscores to break up groups of digits are permitted in
1625 floating-point constants as well.
1629 \c db -0.2 ; "Quarter precision"
1630 \c dw -0.5 ; IEEE 754r/SSE5 half precision
1631 \c dd 1.2 ; an easy one
1632 \c dd 1.222_222_222 ; underscores are permitted
1633 \c dd 0x1p+2 ; 1.0x2^2 = 4.0
1634 \c dq 0x1p+32 ; 1.0x2^32 = 4 294 967 296.0
1635 \c dq 1.e10 ; 10 000 000 000.0
1636 \c dq 1.e+10 ; synonymous with 1.e10
1637 \c dq 1.e-10 ; 0.000 000 000 1
1638 \c dt 3.141592653589793238462 ; pi
1639 \c do 1.e+4000 ; IEEE 754r quad precision
1641 The 8-bit "quarter-precision" floating-point format is
1642 sign:exponent:mantissa = 1:4:3 with an exponent bias of 7. This
1643 appears to be the most frequently used 8-bit floating-point format,
1644 although it is not covered by any formal standard. This is sometimes
1645 called a "\i{minifloat}."
1647 The special operators are used to produce floating-point numbers in
1648 other contexts. They produce the binary representation of a specific
1649 floating-point number as an integer, and can use anywhere integer
1650 constants are used in an expression. \c{__float80m__} and
1651 \c{__float80e__} produce the 64-bit mantissa and 16-bit exponent of an
1652 80-bit floating-point number, and \c{__float128l__} and
1653 \c{__float128h__} produce the lower and upper 64-bit halves of a 128-bit
1654 floating-point number, respectively.
1658 \c mov rax,__float64__(3.141592653589793238462)
1660 ... would assign the binary representation of pi as a 64-bit floating
1661 point number into \c{RAX}. This is exactly equivalent to:
1663 \c mov rax,0x400921fb54442d18
1665 NASM cannot do compile-time arithmetic on floating-point constants.
1666 This is because NASM is designed to be portable - although it always
1667 generates code to run on x86 processors, the assembler itself can
1668 run on any system with an ANSI C compiler. Therefore, the assembler
1669 cannot guarantee the presence of a floating-point unit capable of
1670 handling the \i{Intel number formats}, and so for NASM to be able to
1671 do floating arithmetic it would have to include its own complete set
1672 of floating-point routines, which would significantly increase the
1673 size of the assembler for very little benefit.
1675 The special tokens \i\c{__Infinity__}, \i\c{__QNaN__} (or
1676 \i\c{__NaN__}) and \i\c{__SNaN__} can be used to generate
1677 \I{infinity}infinities, quiet \i{NaN}s, and signalling NaNs,
1678 respectively. These are normally used as macros:
1680 \c %define Inf __Infinity__
1681 \c %define NaN __QNaN__
1683 \c dq +1.5, -Inf, NaN ; Double-precision constants
1685 \S{bcdconst} \I{floating-point, packed BCD constants}Packed BCD Constants
1687 x87-style packed BCD constants can be used in the same contexts as
1688 80-bit floating-point numbers. They are suffixed with \c{p} or
1689 prefixed with \c{0p}, and can include up to 18 decimal digits.
1691 As with other numeric constants, underscores can be used to separate
1696 \c dt 12_345_678_901_245_678p
1697 \c dt -12_345_678_901_245_678p
1702 \H{expr} \i{Expressions}
1704 Expressions in NASM are similar in syntax to those in C. Expressions
1705 are evaluated as 64-bit integers which are then adjusted to the
1708 NASM supports two special tokens in expressions, allowing
1709 calculations to involve the current assembly position: the
1710 \I{$, here}\c{$} and \i\c{$$} tokens. \c{$} evaluates to the assembly
1711 position at the beginning of the line containing the expression; so
1712 you can code an \i{infinite loop} using \c{JMP $}. \c{$$} evaluates
1713 to the beginning of the current section; so you can tell how far
1714 into the section you are by using \c{($-$$)}.
1716 The arithmetic \i{operators} provided by NASM are listed here, in
1717 increasing order of \i{precedence}.
1720 \S{expor} \i\c{|}: \i{Bitwise OR} Operator
1722 The \c{|} operator gives a bitwise OR, exactly as performed by the
1723 \c{OR} machine instruction. Bitwise OR is the lowest-priority
1724 arithmetic operator supported by NASM.
1727 \S{expxor} \i\c{^}: \i{Bitwise XOR} Operator
1729 \c{^} provides the bitwise XOR operation.
1732 \S{expand} \i\c{&}: \i{Bitwise AND} Operator
1734 \c{&} provides the bitwise AND operation.
1737 \S{expshift} \i\c{<<} and \i\c{>>}: \i{Bit Shift} Operators
1739 \c{<<} gives a bit-shift to the left, just as it does in C. So \c{5<<3}
1740 evaluates to 5 times 8, or 40. \c{>>} gives a bit-shift to the
1741 right; in NASM, such a shift is \e{always} unsigned, so that
1742 the bits shifted in from the left-hand end are filled with zero
1743 rather than a sign-extension of the previous highest bit.
1746 \S{expplmi} \I{+ opaddition}\c{+} and \I{- opsubtraction}\c{-}:
1747 \i{Addition} and \i{Subtraction} Operators
1749 The \c{+} and \c{-} operators do perfectly ordinary addition and
1753 \S{expmul} \i\c{*}, \i\c{/}, \i\c{//}, \i\c{%} and \i\c{%%}:
1754 \i{Multiplication} and \i{Division}
1756 \c{*} is the multiplication operator. \c{/} and \c{//} are both
1757 division operators: \c{/} is \i{unsigned division} and \c{//} is
1758 \i{signed division}. Similarly, \c{%} and \c{%%} provide \I{unsigned
1759 modulo}\I{modulo operators}unsigned and
1760 \i{signed modulo} operators respectively.
1762 NASM, like ANSI C, provides no guarantees about the sensible
1763 operation of the signed modulo operator.
1765 Since the \c{%} character is used extensively by the macro
1766 \i{preprocessor}, you should ensure that both the signed and unsigned
1767 modulo operators are followed by white space wherever they appear.
1770 \S{expmul} \i{Unary Operators}: \I{+ opunary}\c{+}, \I{- opunary}\c{-},
1771 \i\c{~}, \I{! opunary}\c{!} and \i\c{SEG}
1773 The highest-priority operators in NASM's expression grammar are
1774 those which only apply to one argument. \c{-} negates its operand,
1775 \c{+} does nothing (it's provided for symmetry with \c{-}), \c{~}
1776 computes the \i{one's complement} of its operand, \c{!} is the
1777 \i{logical negation} operator, and \c{SEG} provides the \i{segment address}
1778 of its operand (explained in more detail in \k{segwrt}).
1781 \H{segwrt} \i\c{SEG} and \i\c{WRT}
1783 When writing large 16-bit programs, which must be split into
1784 multiple \i{segments}, it is often necessary to be able to refer to
1785 the \I{segment address}segment part of the address of a symbol. NASM
1786 supports the \c{SEG} operator to perform this function.
1788 The \c{SEG} operator returns the \i\e{preferred} segment base of a
1789 symbol, defined as the segment base relative to which the offset of
1790 the symbol makes sense. So the code
1792 \c mov ax,seg symbol
1796 will load \c{ES:BX} with a valid pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1798 Things can be more complex than this: since 16-bit segments and
1799 \i{groups} may \I{overlapping segments}overlap, you might occasionally
1800 want to refer to some symbol using a different segment base from the
1801 preferred one. NASM lets you do this, by the use of the \c{WRT}
1802 (With Reference To) keyword. So you can do things like
1804 \c mov ax,weird_seg ; weird_seg is a segment base
1806 \c mov bx,symbol wrt weird_seg
1808 to load \c{ES:BX} with a different, but functionally equivalent,
1809 pointer to the symbol \c{symbol}.
1811 NASM supports far (inter-segment) calls and jumps by means of the
1812 syntax \c{call segment:offset}, where \c{segment} and \c{offset}
1813 both represent immediate values. So to call a far procedure, you
1814 could code either of
1816 \c call (seg procedure):procedure
1817 \c call weird_seg:(procedure wrt weird_seg)
1819 (The parentheses are included for clarity, to show the intended
1820 parsing of the above instructions. They are not necessary in
1823 NASM supports the syntax \I\c{CALL FAR}\c{call far procedure} as a
1824 synonym for the first of the above usages. \c{JMP} works identically
1825 to \c{CALL} in these examples.
1827 To declare a \i{far pointer} to a data item in a data segment, you
1830 \c dw symbol, seg symbol
1832 NASM supports no convenient synonym for this, though you can always
1833 invent one using the macro processor.
1836 \H{strict} \i\c{STRICT}: Inhibiting Optimization
1838 When assembling with the optimizer set to level 2 or higher (see
1839 \k{opt-O}), NASM will use size specifiers (\c{BYTE}, \c{WORD},
1840 \c{DWORD}, \c{QWORD}, \c{TWORD}, \c{OWORD} or \c{YWORD}), but will
1841 give them the smallest possible size. The keyword \c{STRICT} can be
1842 used to inhibit optimization and force a particular operand to be
1843 emitted in the specified size. For example, with the optimizer on, and
1844 in \c{BITS 16} mode,
1848 is encoded in three bytes \c{66 6A 21}, whereas
1850 \c push strict dword 33
1852 is encoded in six bytes, with a full dword immediate operand \c{66 68
1855 With the optimizer off, the same code (six bytes) is generated whether
1856 the \c{STRICT} keyword was used or not.
1859 \H{crit} \i{Critical Expressions}
1861 Although NASM has an optional multi-pass optimizer, there are some
1862 expressions which must be resolvable on the first pass. These are
1863 called \e{Critical Expressions}.
1865 The first pass is used to determine the size of all the assembled
1866 code and data, so that the second pass, when generating all the
1867 code, knows all the symbol addresses the code refers to. So one
1868 thing NASM can't handle is code whose size depends on the value of a
1869 symbol declared after the code in question. For example,
1871 \c times (label-$) db 0
1872 \c label: db 'Where am I?'
1874 The argument to \i\c{TIMES} in this case could equally legally
1875 evaluate to anything at all; NASM will reject this example because
1876 it cannot tell the size of the \c{TIMES} line when it first sees it.
1877 It will just as firmly reject the slightly \I{paradox}paradoxical
1880 \c times (label-$+1) db 0
1881 \c label: db 'NOW where am I?'
1883 in which \e{any} value for the \c{TIMES} argument is by definition
1886 NASM rejects these examples by means of a concept called a
1887 \e{critical expression}, which is defined to be an expression whose
1888 value is required to be computable in the first pass, and which must
1889 therefore depend only on symbols defined before it. The argument to
1890 the \c{TIMES} prefix is a critical expression.
1892 \H{locallab} \i{Local Labels}
1894 NASM gives special treatment to symbols beginning with a \i{period}.
1895 A label beginning with a single period is treated as a \e{local}
1896 label, which means that it is associated with the previous non-local
1897 label. So, for example:
1899 \c label1 ; some code
1907 \c label2 ; some code
1915 In the above code fragment, each \c{JNE} instruction jumps to the
1916 line immediately before it, because the two definitions of \c{.loop}
1917 are kept separate by virtue of each being associated with the
1918 previous non-local label.
1920 This form of local label handling is borrowed from the old Amiga
1921 assembler \i{DevPac}; however, NASM goes one step further, in
1922 allowing access to local labels from other parts of the code. This
1923 is achieved by means of \e{defining} a local label in terms of the
1924 previous non-local label: the first definition of \c{.loop} above is
1925 really defining a symbol called \c{label1.loop}, and the second
1926 defines a symbol called \c{label2.loop}. So, if you really needed
1929 \c label3 ; some more code
1934 Sometimes it is useful - in a macro, for instance - to be able to
1935 define a label which can be referenced from anywhere but which
1936 doesn't interfere with the normal local-label mechanism. Such a
1937 label can't be non-local because it would interfere with subsequent
1938 definitions of, and references to, local labels; and it can't be
1939 local because the macro that defined it wouldn't know the label's
1940 full name. NASM therefore introduces a third type of label, which is
1941 probably only useful in macro definitions: if a label begins with
1942 the \I{label prefix}special prefix \i\c{..@}, then it does nothing
1943 to the local label mechanism. So you could code
1945 \c label1: ; a non-local label
1946 \c .local: ; this is really label1.local
1947 \c ..@foo: ; this is a special symbol
1948 \c label2: ; another non-local label
1949 \c .local: ; this is really label2.local
1951 \c jmp ..@foo ; this will jump three lines up
1953 NASM has the capacity to define other special symbols beginning with
1954 a double period: for example, \c{..start} is used to specify the
1955 entry point in the \c{obj} output format (see \k{dotdotstart}).
1958 \C{preproc} The NASM \i{Preprocessor}
1960 NASM contains a powerful \i{macro processor}, which supports
1961 conditional assembly, multi-level file inclusion, two forms of macro
1962 (single-line and multi-line), and a `context stack' mechanism for
1963 extra macro power. Preprocessor directives all begin with a \c{%}
1966 The preprocessor collapses all lines which end with a backslash (\\)
1967 character into a single line. Thus:
1969 \c %define THIS_VERY_LONG_MACRO_NAME_IS_DEFINED_TO \\
1972 will work like a single-line macro without the backslash-newline
1975 \H{slmacro} \i{Single-Line Macros}
1977 \S{define} The Normal Way: \I\c{%idefine}\i\c{%define}
1979 Single-line macros are defined using the \c{%define} preprocessor
1980 directive. The definitions work in a similar way to C; so you can do
1983 \c %define ctrl 0x1F &
1984 \c %define param(a,b) ((a)+(a)*(b))
1986 \c mov byte [param(2,ebx)], ctrl 'D'
1988 which will expand to
1990 \c mov byte [(2)+(2)*(ebx)], 0x1F & 'D'
1992 When the expansion of a single-line macro contains tokens which
1993 invoke another macro, the expansion is performed at invocation time,
1994 not at definition time. Thus the code
1996 \c %define a(x) 1+b(x)
2001 will evaluate in the expected way to \c{mov ax,1+2*8}, even though
2002 the macro \c{b} wasn't defined at the time of definition of \c{a}.
2004 Macros defined with \c{%define} are \i{case sensitive}: after
2005 \c{%define foo bar}, only \c{foo} will expand to \c{bar}: \c{Foo} or
2006 \c{FOO} will not. By using \c{%idefine} instead of \c{%define} (the
2007 `i' stands for `insensitive') you can define all the case variants
2008 of a macro at once, so that \c{%idefine foo bar} would cause
2009 \c{foo}, \c{Foo}, \c{FOO}, \c{fOO} and so on all to expand to
2012 There is a mechanism which detects when a macro call has occurred as
2013 a result of a previous expansion of the same macro, to guard against
2014 \i{circular references} and infinite loops. If this happens, the
2015 preprocessor will only expand the first occurrence of the macro.
2018 \c %define a(x) 1+a(x)
2022 the macro \c{a(3)} will expand once, becoming \c{1+a(3)}, and will
2023 then expand no further. This behaviour can be useful: see \k{32c}
2024 for an example of its use.
2026 You can \I{overloading, single-line macros}overload single-line
2027 macros: if you write
2029 \c %define foo(x) 1+x
2030 \c %define foo(x,y) 1+x*y
2032 the preprocessor will be able to handle both types of macro call,
2033 by counting the parameters you pass; so \c{foo(3)} will become
2034 \c{1+3} whereas \c{foo(ebx,2)} will become \c{1+ebx*2}. However, if
2039 then no other definition of \c{foo} will be accepted: a macro with
2040 no parameters prohibits the definition of the same name as a macro
2041 \e{with} parameters, and vice versa.
2043 This doesn't prevent single-line macros being \e{redefined}: you can
2044 perfectly well define a macro with
2048 and then re-define it later in the same source file with
2052 Then everywhere the macro \c{foo} is invoked, it will be expanded
2053 according to the most recent definition. This is particularly useful
2054 when defining single-line macros with \c{%assign} (see \k{assign}).
2056 You can \i{pre-define} single-line macros using the `-d' option on
2057 the NASM command line: see \k{opt-d}.
2060 \S{xdefine} Resolving \c{%define}: \I\c{%ixdefine}\i\c{%xdefine}
2062 To have a reference to an embedded single-line macro resolved at the
2063 time that the embedding macro is \e{defined}, as opposed to when the
2064 embedding macro is \e{expanded}, you need a different mechanism to the
2065 one offered by \c{%define}. The solution is to use \c{%xdefine}, or
2066 it's \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ixdefine}.
2068 Suppose you have the following code:
2071 \c %define isFalse isTrue
2080 In this case, \c{val1} is equal to 0, and \c{val2} is equal to 1.
2081 This is because, when a single-line macro is defined using
2082 \c{%define}, it is expanded only when it is called. As \c{isFalse}
2083 expands to \c{isTrue}, the expansion will be the current value of
2084 \c{isTrue}. The first time it is called that is 0, and the second
2087 If you wanted \c{isFalse} to expand to the value assigned to the
2088 embedded macro \c{isTrue} at the time that \c{isFalse} was defined,
2089 you need to change the above code to use \c{%xdefine}.
2091 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2092 \c %xdefine isFalse isTrue
2093 \c %xdefine isTrue 0
2097 \c %xdefine isTrue 1
2101 Now, each time that \c{isFalse} is called, it expands to 1,
2102 as that is what the embedded macro \c{isTrue} expanded to at
2103 the time that \c{isFalse} was defined.
2106 \S{indmacro} \i{Macro Indirection}: \I\c{%[}\c{%[...]}
2108 The \c{%[...]} construct can be used to expand macros in contexts
2109 where macro expansion would otherwise not occur, including in the
2110 names other macros. For example, if you have a set of macros named
2111 \c{Foo16}, \c{Foo32} and \c{Foo64}, you could write:
2113 \c mov ax,Foo%[__BITS__] ; The Foo value
2115 to use the builtin macro \c{__BITS__} (see \k{bitsm}) to automatically
2116 select between them. Similarly, the two statements:
2118 \c %xdefine Bar Quux ; Expands due to %xdefine
2119 \c %define Bar %[Quux] ; Expands due to %[...]
2121 have, in fact, exactly the same effect.
2123 \c{%[...]} concatenates to adjacent tokens in the same way that
2124 multi-line macro parameters do, see \k{concat} for details.
2127 \S{concat%+} Concatenating Single Line Macro Tokens: \i\c{%+}
2129 Individual tokens in single line macros can be concatenated, to produce
2130 longer tokens for later processing. This can be useful if there are
2131 several similar macros that perform similar functions.
2133 Please note that a space is required after \c{%+}, in order to
2134 disambiguate it from the syntax \c{%+1} used in multiline macros.
2136 As an example, consider the following:
2138 \c %define BDASTART 400h ; Start of BIOS data area
2140 \c struc tBIOSDA ; its structure
2146 Now, if we need to access the elements of tBIOSDA in different places,
2149 \c mov ax,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM1addr
2150 \c mov bx,BDASTART + tBIOSDA.COM2addr
2152 This will become pretty ugly (and tedious) if used in many places, and
2153 can be reduced in size significantly by using the following macro:
2155 \c ; Macro to access BIOS variables by their names (from tBDA):
2157 \c %define BDA(x) BDASTART + tBIOSDA. %+ x
2159 Now the above code can be written as:
2161 \c mov ax,BDA(COM1addr)
2162 \c mov bx,BDA(COM2addr)
2164 Using this feature, we can simplify references to a lot of macros (and,
2165 in turn, reduce typing errors).
2168 \S{selfref%?} The Macro Name Itself: \i\c{%?} and \i\c{%??}
2170 The special symbols \c{%?} and \c{%??} can be used to reference the
2171 macro name itself inside a macro expansion, this is supported for both
2172 single-and multi-line macros. \c{%?} refers to the macro name as
2173 \e{invoked}, whereas \c{%??} refers to the macro name as
2174 \e{declared}. The two are always the same for case-sensitive
2175 macros, but for case-insensitive macros, they can differ.
2179 \c %idefine Foo mov %?,%??
2191 \c %idefine keyword $%?
2193 can be used to make a keyword "disappear", for example in case a new
2194 instruction has been used as a label in older code. For example:
2196 \c %idefine pause $%? ; Hide the PAUSE instruction
2199 \S{undef} Undefining Single-Line Macros: \i\c{%undef}
2201 Single-line macros can be removed with the \c{%undef} directive. For
2202 example, the following sequence:
2209 will expand to the instruction \c{mov eax, foo}, since after
2210 \c{%undef} the macro \c{foo} is no longer defined.
2212 Macros that would otherwise be pre-defined can be undefined on the
2213 command-line using the `-u' option on the NASM command line: see
2217 \S{assign} \i{Preprocessor Variables}: \i\c{%assign}
2219 An alternative way to define single-line macros is by means of the
2220 \c{%assign} command (and its \I{case sensitive}case-insensitive
2221 counterpart \i\c{%iassign}, which differs from \c{%assign} in
2222 exactly the same way that \c{%idefine} differs from \c{%define}).
2224 \c{%assign} is used to define single-line macros which take no
2225 parameters and have a numeric value. This value can be specified in
2226 the form of an expression, and it will be evaluated once, when the
2227 \c{%assign} directive is processed.
2229 Like \c{%define}, macros defined using \c{%assign} can be re-defined
2230 later, so you can do things like
2234 to increment the numeric value of a macro.
2236 \c{%assign} is useful for controlling the termination of \c{%rep}
2237 preprocessor loops: see \k{rep} for an example of this. Another
2238 use for \c{%assign} is given in \k{16c} and \k{32c}.
2240 The expression passed to \c{%assign} is a \i{critical expression}
2241 (see \k{crit}), and must also evaluate to a pure number (rather than
2242 a relocatable reference such as a code or data address, or anything
2243 involving a register).
2246 \S{defstr} Defining Strings: \I\c{%idefstr}\i\c{%defstr}
2248 \c{%defstr}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%idefstr}, define
2249 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2250 entire right-hand side, after macro expansion, to a quoted string
2255 \c %defstr test TEST
2259 \c %define test 'TEST'
2261 This can be used, for example, with the \c{%!} construct (see
2264 \c %defstr PATH %!PATH ; The operating system PATH variable
2267 \S{deftok} Defining Tokens: \I\c{%ideftok}\i\c{%deftok}
2269 \c{%deftok}, and its case-insensitive counterpart \c{%ideftok}, define
2270 or redefine a single-line macro without parameters but converts the
2271 second parameter, after string conversion, to a sequence of tokens.
2275 \c %deftok test 'TEST'
2279 \c %define test TEST
2282 \H{strlen} \i{String Manipulation in Macros}
2284 It's often useful to be able to handle strings in macros. NASM
2285 supports a few simple string handling macro operators from which
2286 more complex operations can be constructed.
2288 All the string operators define or redefine a value (either a string
2289 or a numeric value) to a single-line macro. When producing a string
2290 value, it may change the style of quoting of the input string or
2291 strings, and possibly use \c{\\}-escapes inside \c{`}-quoted strings.
2293 \S{strcat} \i{Concatenating Strings}: \i\c{%strcat}
2295 The \c{%strcat} operator concatenates quoted strings and assign them to
2296 a single-line macro.
2300 \c %strcat alpha "Alpha: ", '12" screen'
2302 ... would assign the value \c{'Alpha: 12" screen'} to \c{alpha}.
2305 \c %strcat beta '"foo"\', "'bar'"
2307 ... would assign the value \c{`"foo"\\\\'bar'`} to \c{beta}.
2309 The use of commas to separate strings is permitted but optional.
2312 \S{strlen} \i{String Length}: \i\c{%strlen}
2314 The \c{%strlen} operator assigns the length of a string to a macro.
2317 \c %strlen charcnt 'my string'
2319 In this example, \c{charcnt} would receive the value 9, just as
2320 if an \c{%assign} had been used. In this example, \c{'my string'}
2321 was a literal string but it could also have been a single-line
2322 macro that expands to a string, as in the following example:
2324 \c %define sometext 'my string'
2325 \c %strlen charcnt sometext
2327 As in the first case, this would result in \c{charcnt} being
2328 assigned the value of 9.
2331 \S{substr} \i{Extracting Substrings}: \i\c{%substr}
2333 Individual letters or substrings in strings can be extracted using the
2334 \c{%substr} operator. An example of its use is probably more useful
2335 than the description:
2337 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'x'
2338 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'y'
2339 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 3 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'z'
2340 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2341 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-1 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yzw'
2342 \c %substr mychar 'xyzw' 2,-2 ; equivalent to %define mychar 'yz'
2344 As with \c{%strlen} (see \k{strlen}), the first parameter is the
2345 single-line macro to be created and the second is the string. The
2346 third parameter specifies the first character to be selected, and the
2347 optional fourth parameter preceeded by comma) is the length. Note
2348 that the first index is 1, not 0 and the last index is equal to the
2349 value that \c{%strlen} would assign given the same string. Index
2350 values out of range result in an empty string. A negative length
2351 means "until N-1 characters before the end of string", i.e. \c{-1}
2352 means until end of string, \c{-2} until one character before, etc.
2355 \H{mlmacro} \i{Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%imacro}\i\c{%macro}
2357 Multi-line macros are much more like the type of macro seen in MASM
2358 and TASM: a multi-line macro definition in NASM looks something like
2361 \c %macro prologue 1
2369 This defines a C-like function prologue as a macro: so you would
2370 invoke the macro with a call such as
2372 \c myfunc: prologue 12
2374 which would expand to the three lines of code
2380 The number \c{1} after the macro name in the \c{%macro} line defines
2381 the number of parameters the macro \c{prologue} expects to receive.
2382 The use of \c{%1} inside the macro definition refers to the first
2383 parameter to the macro call. With a macro taking more than one
2384 parameter, subsequent parameters would be referred to as \c{%2},
2387 Multi-line macros, like single-line macros, are \i{case-sensitive},
2388 unless you define them using the alternative directive \c{%imacro}.
2390 If you need to pass a comma as \e{part} of a parameter to a
2391 multi-line macro, you can do that by enclosing the entire parameter
2392 in \I{braces, around macro parameters}braces. So you could code
2401 \c silly 'a', letter_a ; letter_a: db 'a'
2402 \c silly 'ab', string_ab ; string_ab: db 'ab'
2403 \c silly {13,10}, crlf ; crlf: db 13,10
2406 \S{mlrmacro} \i{Recursive Multi-Line Macros}: \I\c{%irmacro}\i\c{%rmacro}
2408 A multi-line macro cannot be referenced within itself, in order to
2409 prevent accidental infinite recursion.
2411 Recursive multi-line macros allow for self-referencing, with the
2412 caveat that the user is aware of the existence, use and purpose of
2413 recursive multi-line macros. There is also a generous, but sane, upper
2414 limit to the number of recursions, in order to prevent run-away memory
2415 consumption in case of accidental infinite recursion.
2417 As with non-recursive multi-line macros, recursive multi-line macros are
2418 \i{case-sensitive}, unless you define them using the alternative
2419 directive \c{%irmacro}.
2422 \S{mlmacover} Overloading Multi-Line Macros\I{overloading, multi-line macros}
2424 As with single-line macros, multi-line macros can be overloaded by
2425 defining the same macro name several times with different numbers of
2426 parameters. This time, no exception is made for macros with no
2427 parameters at all. So you could define
2429 \c %macro prologue 0
2436 to define an alternative form of the function prologue which
2437 allocates no local stack space.
2439 Sometimes, however, you might want to `overload' a machine
2440 instruction; for example, you might want to define
2449 so that you could code
2451 \c push ebx ; this line is not a macro call
2452 \c push eax,ecx ; but this one is
2454 Ordinarily, NASM will give a warning for the first of the above two
2455 lines, since \c{push} is now defined to be a macro, and is being
2456 invoked with a number of parameters for which no definition has been
2457 given. The correct code will still be generated, but the assembler
2458 will give a warning. This warning can be disabled by the use of the
2459 \c{-w-macro-params} command-line option (see \k{opt-w}).
2462 \S{maclocal} \i{Macro-Local Labels}
2464 NASM allows you to define labels within a multi-line macro
2465 definition in such a way as to make them local to the macro call: so
2466 calling the same macro multiple times will use a different label
2467 each time. You do this by prefixing \i\c{%%} to the label name. So
2468 you can invent an instruction which executes a \c{RET} if the \c{Z}
2469 flag is set by doing this:
2479 You can call this macro as many times as you want, and every time
2480 you call it NASM will make up a different `real' name to substitute
2481 for the label \c{%%skip}. The names NASM invents are of the form
2482 \c{..@2345.skip}, where the number 2345 changes with every macro
2483 call. The \i\c{..@} prefix prevents macro-local labels from
2484 interfering with the local label mechanism, as described in
2485 \k{locallab}. You should avoid defining your own labels in this form
2486 (the \c{..@} prefix, then a number, then another period) in case
2487 they interfere with macro-local labels.
2490 \S{mlmacgre} \i{Greedy Macro Parameters}
2492 Occasionally it is useful to define a macro which lumps its entire
2493 command line into one parameter definition, possibly after
2494 extracting one or two smaller parameters from the front. An example
2495 might be a macro to write a text string to a file in MS-DOS, where
2496 you might want to be able to write
2498 \c writefile [filehandle],"hello, world",13,10
2500 NASM allows you to define the last parameter of a macro to be
2501 \e{greedy}, meaning that if you invoke the macro with more
2502 parameters than it expects, all the spare parameters get lumped into
2503 the last defined one along with the separating commas. So if you
2506 \c %macro writefile 2+
2512 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
2519 then the example call to \c{writefile} above will work as expected:
2520 the text before the first comma, \c{[filehandle]}, is used as the
2521 first macro parameter and expanded when \c{%1} is referred to, and
2522 all the subsequent text is lumped into \c{%2} and placed after the
2525 The greedy nature of the macro is indicated to NASM by the use of
2526 the \I{+ modifier}\c{+} sign after the parameter count on the
2529 If you define a greedy macro, you are effectively telling NASM how
2530 it should expand the macro given \e{any} number of parameters from
2531 the actual number specified up to infinity; in this case, for
2532 example, NASM now knows what to do when it sees a call to
2533 \c{writefile} with 2, 3, 4 or more parameters. NASM will take this
2534 into account when overloading macros, and will not allow you to
2535 define another form of \c{writefile} taking 4 parameters (for
2538 Of course, the above macro could have been implemented as a
2539 non-greedy macro, in which case the call to it would have had to
2542 \c writefile [filehandle], {"hello, world",13,10}
2544 NASM provides both mechanisms for putting \i{commas in macro
2545 parameters}, and you choose which one you prefer for each macro
2548 See \k{sectmac} for a better way to write the above macro.
2551 \S{mlmacdef} \i{Default Macro Parameters}
2553 NASM also allows you to define a multi-line macro with a \e{range}
2554 of allowable parameter counts. If you do this, you can specify
2555 defaults for \i{omitted parameters}. So, for example:
2557 \c %macro die 0-1 "Painful program death has occurred."
2565 This macro (which makes use of the \c{writefile} macro defined in
2566 \k{mlmacgre}) can be called with an explicit error message, which it
2567 will display on the error output stream before exiting, or it can be
2568 called with no parameters, in which case it will use the default
2569 error message supplied in the macro definition.
2571 In general, you supply a minimum and maximum number of parameters
2572 for a macro of this type; the minimum number of parameters are then
2573 required in the macro call, and then you provide defaults for the
2574 optional ones. So if a macro definition began with the line
2576 \c %macro foobar 1-3 eax,[ebx+2]
2578 then it could be called with between one and three parameters, and
2579 \c{%1} would always be taken from the macro call. \c{%2}, if not
2580 specified by the macro call, would default to \c{eax}, and \c{%3} if
2581 not specified would default to \c{[ebx+2]}.
2583 You can provide extra information to a macro by providing
2584 too many default parameters:
2586 \c %macro quux 1 something
2588 This will trigger a warning by default; see \k{opt-w} for
2590 When \c{quux} is invoked, it receives not one but two parameters.
2591 \c{something} can be referred to as \c{%2}. The difference
2592 between passing \c{something} this way and writing \c{something}
2593 in the macro body is that with this way \c{something} is evaluated
2594 when the macro is defined, not when it is expanded.
2596 You may omit parameter defaults from the macro definition, in which
2597 case the parameter default is taken to be blank. This can be useful
2598 for macros which can take a variable number of parameters, since the
2599 \i\c{%0} token (see \k{percent0}) allows you to determine how many
2600 parameters were really passed to the macro call.
2602 This defaulting mechanism can be combined with the greedy-parameter
2603 mechanism; so the \c{die} macro above could be made more powerful,
2604 and more useful, by changing the first line of the definition to
2606 \c %macro die 0-1+ "Painful program death has occurred.",13,10
2608 The maximum parameter count can be infinite, denoted by \c{*}. In
2609 this case, of course, it is impossible to provide a \e{full} set of
2610 default parameters. Examples of this usage are shown in \k{rotate}.
2613 \S{percent0} \i\c{%0}: \I{counting macro parameters}Macro Parameter Counter
2615 The parameter reference \c{%0} will return a numeric constant giving the
2616 number of parameters received, that is, if \c{%0} is n then \c{%}n is the
2617 last parameter. \c{%0} is mostly useful for macros that can take a variable
2618 number of parameters. It can be used as an argument to \c{%rep}
2619 (see \k{rep}) in order to iterate through all the parameters of a macro.
2620 Examples are given in \k{rotate}.
2623 \S{rotate} \i\c{%rotate}: \i{Rotating Macro Parameters}
2625 Unix shell programmers will be familiar with the \I{shift
2626 command}\c{shift} shell command, which allows the arguments passed
2627 to a shell script (referenced as \c{$1}, \c{$2} and so on) to be
2628 moved left by one place, so that the argument previously referenced
2629 as \c{$2} becomes available as \c{$1}, and the argument previously
2630 referenced as \c{$1} is no longer available at all.
2632 NASM provides a similar mechanism, in the form of \c{%rotate}. As
2633 its name suggests, it differs from the Unix \c{shift} in that no
2634 parameters are lost: parameters rotated off the left end of the
2635 argument list reappear on the right, and vice versa.
2637 \c{%rotate} is invoked with a single numeric argument (which may be
2638 an expression). The macro parameters are rotated to the left by that
2639 many places. If the argument to \c{%rotate} is negative, the macro
2640 parameters are rotated to the right.
2642 \I{iterating over macro parameters}So a pair of macros to save and
2643 restore a set of registers might work as follows:
2645 \c %macro multipush 1-*
2654 This macro invokes the \c{PUSH} instruction on each of its arguments
2655 in turn, from left to right. It begins by pushing its first
2656 argument, \c{%1}, then invokes \c{%rotate} to move all the arguments
2657 one place to the left, so that the original second argument is now
2658 available as \c{%1}. Repeating this procedure as many times as there
2659 were arguments (achieved by supplying \c{%0} as the argument to
2660 \c{%rep}) causes each argument in turn to be pushed.
2662 Note also the use of \c{*} as the maximum parameter count,
2663 indicating that there is no upper limit on the number of parameters
2664 you may supply to the \i\c{multipush} macro.
2666 It would be convenient, when using this macro, to have a \c{POP}
2667 equivalent, which \e{didn't} require the arguments to be given in
2668 reverse order. Ideally, you would write the \c{multipush} macro
2669 call, then cut-and-paste the line to where the pop needed to be
2670 done, and change the name of the called macro to \c{multipop}, and
2671 the macro would take care of popping the registers in the opposite
2672 order from the one in which they were pushed.
2674 This can be done by the following definition:
2676 \c %macro multipop 1-*
2685 This macro begins by rotating its arguments one place to the
2686 \e{right}, so that the original \e{last} argument appears as \c{%1}.
2687 This is then popped, and the arguments are rotated right again, so
2688 the second-to-last argument becomes \c{%1}. Thus the arguments are
2689 iterated through in reverse order.
2692 \S{concat} \i{Concatenating Macro Parameters}
2694 NASM can concatenate macro parameters and macro indirection constructs
2695 on to other text surrounding them. This allows you to declare a family
2696 of symbols, for example, in a macro definition. If, for example, you
2697 wanted to generate a table of key codes along with offsets into the
2698 table, you could code something like
2700 \c %macro keytab_entry 2
2702 \c keypos%1 equ $-keytab
2708 \c keytab_entry F1,128+1
2709 \c keytab_entry F2,128+2
2710 \c keytab_entry Return,13
2712 which would expand to
2715 \c keyposF1 equ $-keytab
2717 \c keyposF2 equ $-keytab
2719 \c keyposReturn equ $-keytab
2722 You can just as easily concatenate text on to the other end of a
2723 macro parameter, by writing \c{%1foo}.
2725 If you need to append a \e{digit} to a macro parameter, for example
2726 defining labels \c{foo1} and \c{foo2} when passed the parameter
2727 \c{foo}, you can't code \c{%11} because that would be taken as the
2728 eleventh macro parameter. Instead, you must code
2729 \I{braces, after % sign}\c{%\{1\}1}, which will separate the first
2730 \c{1} (giving the number of the macro parameter) from the second
2731 (literal text to be concatenated to the parameter).
2733 This concatenation can also be applied to other preprocessor in-line
2734 objects, such as macro-local labels (\k{maclocal}) and context-local
2735 labels (\k{ctxlocal}). In all cases, ambiguities in syntax can be
2736 resolved by enclosing everything after the \c{%} sign and before the
2737 literal text in braces: so \c{%\{%foo\}bar} concatenates the text
2738 \c{bar} to the end of the real name of the macro-local label
2739 \c{%%foo}. (This is unnecessary, since the form NASM uses for the
2740 real names of macro-local labels means that the two usages
2741 \c{%\{%foo\}bar} and \c{%%foobar} would both expand to the same
2742 thing anyway; nevertheless, the capability is there.)
2744 The single-line macro indirection construct, \c{%[...]}
2745 (\k{indmacro}), behaves the same way as macro parameters for the
2746 purpose of concatenation.
2748 See also the \c{%+} operator, \k{concat%+}.
2751 \S{mlmaccc} \i{Condition Codes as Macro Parameters}
2753 NASM can give special treatment to a macro parameter which contains
2754 a condition code. For a start, you can refer to the macro parameter
2755 \c{%1} by means of the alternative syntax \i\c{%+1}, which informs
2756 NASM that this macro parameter is supposed to contain a condition
2757 code, and will cause the preprocessor to report an error message if
2758 the macro is called with a parameter which is \e{not} a valid
2761 Far more usefully, though, you can refer to the macro parameter by
2762 means of \i\c{%-1}, which NASM will expand as the \e{inverse}
2763 condition code. So the \c{retz} macro defined in \k{maclocal} can be
2764 replaced by a general \i{conditional-return macro} like this:
2774 This macro can now be invoked using calls like \c{retc ne}, which
2775 will cause the conditional-jump instruction in the macro expansion
2776 to come out as \c{JE}, or \c{retc po} which will make the jump a
2779 The \c{%+1} macro-parameter reference is quite happy to interpret
2780 the arguments \c{CXZ} and \c{ECXZ} as valid condition codes;
2781 however, \c{%-1} will report an error if passed either of these,
2782 because no inverse condition code exists.
2785 \S{nolist} \i{Disabling Listing Expansion}\I\c{.nolist}
2787 When NASM is generating a listing file from your program, it will
2788 generally expand multi-line macros by means of writing the macro
2789 call and then listing each line of the expansion. This allows you to
2790 see which instructions in the macro expansion are generating what
2791 code; however, for some macros this clutters the listing up
2794 NASM therefore provides the \c{.nolist} qualifier, which you can
2795 include in a macro definition to inhibit the expansion of the macro
2796 in the listing file. The \c{.nolist} qualifier comes directly after
2797 the number of parameters, like this:
2799 \c %macro foo 1.nolist
2803 \c %macro bar 1-5+.nolist a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h
2805 \S{unmacro} Undefining Multi-Line Macros: \i\c{%unmacro}
2807 Multi-line macros can be removed with the \c{%unmacro} directive.
2808 Unlike the \c{%undef} directive, however, \c{%unmacro} takes an
2809 argument specification, and will only remove \i{exact matches} with
2810 that argument specification.
2819 removes the previously defined macro \c{foo}, but
2826 does \e{not} remove the macro \c{bar}, since the argument
2827 specification does not match exactly.
2829 \H{condasm} \i{Conditional Assembly}\I\c{%if}
2831 Similarly to the C preprocessor, NASM allows sections of a source
2832 file to be assembled only if certain conditions are met. The general
2833 syntax of this feature looks like this:
2836 \c ; some code which only appears if <condition> is met
2837 \c %elif<condition2>
2838 \c ; only appears if <condition> is not met but <condition2> is
2840 \c ; this appears if neither <condition> nor <condition2> was met
2843 The inverse forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn} are also supported.
2845 The \i\c{%else} clause is optional, as is the \i\c{%elif} clause.
2846 You can have more than one \c{%elif} clause as well.
2848 There are a number of variants of the \c{%if} directive. Each has its
2849 corresponding \c{%elif}, \c{%ifn}, and \c{%elifn} directives; for
2850 example, the equivalents to the \c{%ifdef} directive are \c{%elifdef},
2851 \c{%ifndef}, and \c{%elifndef}.
2853 \S{ifdef} \i\c{%ifdef}: Testing Single-Line Macro Existence\I{testing,
2854 single-line macro existence}
2856 Beginning a conditional-assembly block with the line \c{%ifdef
2857 MACRO} will assemble the subsequent code if, and only if, a
2858 single-line macro called \c{MACRO} is defined. If not, then the
2859 \c{%elif} and \c{%else} blocks (if any) will be processed instead.
2861 For example, when debugging a program, you might want to write code
2864 \c ; perform some function
2866 \c writefile 2,"Function performed successfully",13,10
2868 \c ; go and do something else
2870 Then you could use the command-line option \c{-dDEBUG} to create a
2871 version of the program which produced debugging messages, and remove
2872 the option to generate the final release version of the program.
2874 You can test for a macro \e{not} being defined by using
2875 \i\c{%ifndef} instead of \c{%ifdef}. You can also test for macro
2876 definitions in \c{%elif} blocks by using \i\c{%elifdef} and
2880 \S{ifmacro} \i\c{%ifmacro}: Testing Multi-Line Macro
2881 Existence\I{testing, multi-line macro existence}
2883 The \c{%ifmacro} directive operates in the same way as the \c{%ifdef}
2884 directive, except that it checks for the existence of a multi-line macro.
2886 For example, you may be working with a large project and not have control
2887 over the macros in a library. You may want to create a macro with one
2888 name if it doesn't already exist, and another name if one with that name
2891 The \c{%ifmacro} is considered true if defining a macro with the given name
2892 and number of arguments would cause a definitions conflict. For example:
2894 \c %ifmacro MyMacro 1-3
2896 \c %error "MyMacro 1-3" causes a conflict with an existing macro.
2900 \c %macro MyMacro 1-3
2902 \c ; insert code to define the macro
2908 This will create the macro "MyMacro 1-3" if no macro already exists which
2909 would conflict with it, and emits a warning if there would be a definition
2912 You can test for the macro not existing by using the \i\c{%ifnmacro} instead
2913 of \c{%ifmacro}. Additional tests can be performed in \c{%elif} blocks by using
2914 \i\c{%elifmacro} and \i\c{%elifnmacro}.
2917 \S{ifctx} \i\c{%ifctx}: Testing the Context Stack\I{testing, context
2920 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%ifctx} will cause the
2921 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the top context on
2922 the preprocessor's context stack has the same name as one of the arguments.
2923 As with \c{%ifdef}, the inverse and \c{%elif} forms \i\c{%ifnctx},
2924 \i\c{%elifctx} and \i\c{%elifnctx} are also supported.
2926 For more details of the context stack, see \k{ctxstack}. For a
2927 sample use of \c{%ifctx}, see \k{blockif}.
2930 \S{if} \i\c{%if}: Testing Arbitrary Numeric Expressions\I{testing,
2931 arbitrary numeric expressions}
2933 The conditional-assembly construct \c{%if expr} will cause the
2934 subsequent code to be assembled if and only if the value of the
2935 numeric expression \c{expr} is non-zero. An example of the use of
2936 this feature is in deciding when to break out of a \c{%rep}
2937 preprocessor loop: see \k{rep} for a detailed example.
2939 The expression given to \c{%if}, and its counterpart \i\c{%elif}, is
2940 a critical expression (see \k{crit}).
2942 \c{%if} extends the normal NASM expression syntax, by providing a
2943 set of \i{relational operators} which are not normally available in
2944 expressions. The operators \i\c{=}, \i\c{<}, \i\c{>}, \i\c{<=},
2945 \i\c{>=} and \i\c{<>} test equality, less-than, greater-than,
2946 less-or-equal, greater-or-equal and not-equal respectively. The
2947 C-like forms \i\c{==} and \i\c{!=} are supported as alternative
2948 forms of \c{=} and \c{<>}. In addition, low-priority logical
2949 operators \i\c{&&}, \i\c{^^} and \i\c{||} are provided, supplying
2950 \i{logical AND}, \i{logical XOR} and \i{logical OR}. These work like
2951 the C logical operators (although C has no logical XOR), in that
2952 they always return either 0 or 1, and treat any non-zero input as 1
2953 (so that \c{^^}, for example, returns 1 if exactly one of its inputs
2954 is zero, and 0 otherwise). The relational operators also return 1
2955 for true and 0 for false.
2957 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%if} has a counterpart
2958 \i\c{%elif}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifn} and \i\c{%elifn}.
2960 \S{ifidn} \i\c{%ifidn} and \i\c{%ifidni}: Testing Exact Text
2961 Identity\I{testing, exact text identity}
2963 The construct \c{%ifidn text1,text2} will cause the subsequent code
2964 to be assembled if and only if \c{text1} and \c{text2}, after
2965 expanding single-line macros, are identical pieces of text.
2966 Differences in white space are not counted.
2968 \c{%ifidni} is similar to \c{%ifidn}, but is \i{case-insensitive}.
2970 For example, the following macro pushes a register or number on the
2971 stack, and allows you to treat \c{IP} as a real register:
2973 \c %macro pushparam 1
2984 Like other \c{%if} constructs, \c{%ifidn} has a counterpart
2985 \i\c{%elifidn}, and negative forms \i\c{%ifnidn} and \i\c{%elifnidn}.
2986 Similarly, \c{%ifidni} has counterparts \i\c{%elifidni},
2987 \i\c{%ifnidni} and \i\c{%elifnidni}.
2989 \S{iftyp} \i\c{%ifid}, \i\c{%ifnum}, \i\c{%ifstr}: Testing Token
2990 Types\I{testing, token types}
2992 Some macros will want to perform different tasks depending on
2993 whether they are passed a number, a string, or an identifier. For
2994 example, a string output macro might want to be able to cope with
2995 being passed either a string constant or a pointer to an existing
2998 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifid}, taking one parameter
2999 (which may be blank), assembles the subsequent code if and only if
3000 the first token in the parameter exists and is an identifier.
3001 \c{%ifnum} works similarly, but tests for the token being a numeric
3002 constant; \c{%ifstr} tests for it being a string.
3004 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
3005 extended to take advantage of \c{%ifstr} in the following fashion:
3007 \c %macro writefile 2-3+
3016 \c %%endstr: mov dx,%%str
3017 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
3028 Then the \c{writefile} macro can cope with being called in either of
3029 the following two ways:
3031 \c writefile [file], strpointer, length
3032 \c writefile [file], "hello", 13, 10
3034 In the first, \c{strpointer} is used as the address of an
3035 already-declared string, and \c{length} is used as its length; in
3036 the second, a string is given to the macro, which therefore declares
3037 it itself and works out the address and length for itself.
3039 Note the use of \c{%if} inside the \c{%ifstr}: this is to detect
3040 whether the macro was passed two arguments (so the string would be a
3041 single string constant, and \c{db %2} would be adequate) or more (in
3042 which case, all but the first two would be lumped together into
3043 \c{%3}, and \c{db %2,%3} would be required).
3045 The usual \I\c{%elifid}\I\c{%elifnum}\I\c{%elifstr}\c{%elif}...,
3046 \I\c{%ifnid}\I\c{%ifnnum}\I\c{%ifnstr}\c{%ifn}..., and
3047 \I\c{%elifnid}\I\c{%elifnnum}\I\c{%elifnstr}\c{%elifn}... versions
3048 exist for each of \c{%ifid}, \c{%ifnum} and \c{%ifstr}.
3050 \S{iftoken} \i\c{%iftoken}: Test for a Single Token
3052 Some macros will want to do different things depending on if it is
3053 passed a single token (e.g. paste it to something else using \c{%+})
3054 versus a multi-token sequence.
3056 The conditional assembly construct \c{%iftoken} assembles the
3057 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters consist of
3058 exactly one token, possibly surrounded by whitespace.
3064 will assemble the subsequent code, but
3068 will not, since \c{-1} contains two tokens: the unary minus operator
3069 \c{-}, and the number \c{1}.
3071 The usual \i\c{%eliftoken}, \i\c\{%ifntoken}, and \i\c{%elifntoken}
3072 variants are also provided.
3074 \S{ifempty} \i\c{%ifempty}: Test for Empty Expansion
3076 The conditional assembly construct \c{%ifempty} assembles the
3077 subsequent code if and only if the expanded parameters do not contain
3078 any tokens at all, whitespace excepted.
3080 The usual \i\c{%elifempty}, \i\c\{%ifnempty}, and \i\c{%elifnempty}
3081 variants are also provided.
3083 \H{rep} \i{Preprocessor Loops}\I{repeating code}: \i\c{%rep}
3085 NASM's \c{TIMES} prefix, though useful, cannot be used to invoke a
3086 multi-line macro multiple times, because it is processed by NASM
3087 after macros have already been expanded. Therefore NASM provides
3088 another form of loop, this time at the preprocessor level: \c{%rep}.
3090 The directives \c{%rep} and \i\c{%endrep} (\c{%rep} takes a numeric
3091 argument, which can be an expression; \c{%endrep} takes no
3092 arguments) can be used to enclose a chunk of code, which is then
3093 replicated as many times as specified by the preprocessor:
3097 \c inc word [table+2*i]
3101 This will generate a sequence of 64 \c{INC} instructions,
3102 incrementing every word of memory from \c{[table]} to
3105 For more complex termination conditions, or to break out of a repeat
3106 loop part way along, you can use the \i\c{%exitrep} directive to
3107 terminate the loop, like this:
3122 \c fib_number equ ($-fibonacci)/2
3124 This produces a list of all the Fibonacci numbers that will fit in
3125 16 bits. Note that a maximum repeat count must still be given to
3126 \c{%rep}. This is to prevent the possibility of NASM getting into an
3127 infinite loop in the preprocessor, which (on multitasking or
3128 multi-user systems) would typically cause all the system memory to
3129 be gradually used up and other applications to start crashing.
3132 \H{files} Source Files and Dependencies
3134 These commands allow you to split your sources into multiple files.
3136 \S{include} \i\c{%include}: \i{Including Other Files}
3138 Using, once again, a very similar syntax to the C preprocessor,
3139 NASM's preprocessor lets you include other source files into your
3140 code. This is done by the use of the \i\c{%include} directive:
3142 \c %include "macros.mac"
3144 will include the contents of the file \c{macros.mac} into the source
3145 file containing the \c{%include} directive.
3147 Include files are \I{searching for include files}searched for in the
3148 current directory (the directory you're in when you run NASM, as
3149 opposed to the location of the NASM executable or the location of
3150 the source file), plus any directories specified on the NASM command
3151 line using the \c{-i} option.
3153 The standard C idiom for preventing a file being included more than
3154 once is just as applicable in NASM: if the file \c{macros.mac} has
3157 \c %ifndef MACROS_MAC
3158 \c %define MACROS_MAC
3159 \c ; now define some macros
3162 then including the file more than once will not cause errors,
3163 because the second time the file is included nothing will happen
3164 because the macro \c{MACROS_MAC} will already be defined.
3166 You can force a file to be included even if there is no \c{%include}
3167 directive that explicitly includes it, by using the \i\c{-p} option
3168 on the NASM command line (see \k{opt-p}).
3171 \S{pathsearch} \i\c{%pathsearch}: Search the Include Path
3173 The \c{%pathsearch} directive takes a single-line macro name and a
3174 filename, and declare or redefines the specified single-line macro to
3175 be the include-path-resolved version of the filename, if the file
3176 exists (otherwise, it is passed unchanged.)
3180 \c %pathsearch MyFoo "foo.bin"
3182 ... with \c{-Ibins/} in the include path may end up defining the macro
3183 \c{MyFoo} to be \c{"bins/foo.bin"}.
3186 \S{depend} \i\c{%depend}: Add Dependent Files
3188 The \c{%depend} directive takes a filename and adds it to the list of
3189 files to be emitted as dependency generation when the \c{-M} options
3190 and its relatives (see \k{opt-M}) are used. It produces no output.
3192 This is generally used in conjunction with \c{%pathsearch}. For
3193 example, a simplified version of the standard macro wrapper for the
3194 \c{INCBIN} directive looks like:
3196 \c %imacro incbin 1-2+ 0
3197 \c %pathsearch dep %1
3202 This first resolves the location of the file into the macro \c{dep},
3203 then adds it to the dependency lists, and finally issues the
3204 assembler-level \c{INCBIN} directive.
3207 \S{use} \i\c{%use}: Include Standard Macro Package
3209 The \c{%use} directive is similar to \c{%include}, but rather than
3210 including the contents of a file, it includes a named standard macro
3211 package. The standard macro packages are part of NASM, and are
3212 described in \k{macropkg}.
3214 Unlike the \c{%include} directive, package names for the \c{%use}
3215 directive do not require quotes, but quotes are permitted. In NASM
3216 2.04 and 2.05 the unquoted form would be macro-expanded; this is no
3217 longer true. Thus, the following lines are equivalent:
3222 Standard macro packages are protected from multiple inclusion. When a
3223 standard macro package is used, a testable single-line macro of the
3224 form \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is also defined, see \k{use_def}.
3226 \H{ctxstack} The \i{Context Stack}
3228 Having labels that are local to a macro definition is sometimes not
3229 quite powerful enough: sometimes you want to be able to share labels
3230 between several macro calls. An example might be a \c{REPEAT} ...
3231 \c{UNTIL} loop, in which the expansion of the \c{REPEAT} macro
3232 would need to be able to refer to a label which the \c{UNTIL} macro
3233 had defined. However, for such a macro you would also want to be
3234 able to nest these loops.
3236 NASM provides this level of power by means of a \e{context stack}.
3237 The preprocessor maintains a stack of \e{contexts}, each of which is
3238 characterized by a name. You add a new context to the stack using
3239 the \i\c{%push} directive, and remove one using \i\c{%pop}. You can
3240 define labels that are local to a particular context on the stack.
3243 \S{pushpop} \i\c{%push} and \i\c{%pop}: \I{creating
3244 contexts}\I{removing contexts}Creating and Removing Contexts
3246 The \c{%push} directive is used to create a new context and place it
3247 on the top of the context stack. \c{%push} takes an optional argument,
3248 which is the name of the context. For example:
3252 This pushes a new context called \c{foobar} on the stack. You can have
3253 several contexts on the stack with the same name: they can still be
3254 distinguished. If no name is given, the context is unnamed (this is
3255 normally used when both the \c{%push} and the \c{%pop} are inside a
3256 single macro definition.)
3258 The directive \c{%pop}, taking one optional argument, removes the top
3259 context from the context stack and destroys it, along with any
3260 labels associated with it. If an argument is given, it must match the
3261 name of the current context, otherwise it will issue an error.
3264 \S{ctxlocal} \i{Context-Local Labels}
3266 Just as the usage \c{%%foo} defines a label which is local to the
3267 particular macro call in which it is used, the usage \I{%$}\c{%$foo}
3268 is used to define a label which is local to the context on the top
3269 of the context stack. So the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} example given
3270 above could be implemented by means of:
3286 and invoked by means of, for example,
3294 which would scan every fourth byte of a string in search of the byte
3297 If you need to define, or access, labels local to the context
3298 \e{below} the top one on the stack, you can use \I{%$$}\c{%$$foo}, or
3299 \c{%$$$foo} for the context below that, and so on.
3302 \S{ctxdefine} \i{Context-Local Single-Line Macros}
3304 NASM also allows you to define single-line macros which are local to
3305 a particular context, in just the same way:
3307 \c %define %$localmac 3
3309 will define the single-line macro \c{%$localmac} to be local to the
3310 top context on the stack. Of course, after a subsequent \c{%push},
3311 it can then still be accessed by the name \c{%$$localmac}.
3314 \S{ctxrepl} \i\c{%repl}: \I{renaming contexts}Renaming a Context
3316 If you need to change the name of the top context on the stack (in
3317 order, for example, to have it respond differently to \c{%ifctx}),
3318 you can execute a \c{%pop} followed by a \c{%push}; but this will
3319 have the side effect of destroying all context-local labels and
3320 macros associated with the context that was just popped.
3322 NASM provides the directive \c{%repl}, which \e{replaces} a context
3323 with a different name, without touching the associated macros and
3324 labels. So you could replace the destructive code
3329 with the non-destructive version \c{%repl newname}.
3332 \S{blockif} Example Use of the \i{Context Stack}: \i{Block IFs}
3334 This example makes use of almost all the context-stack features,
3335 including the conditional-assembly construct \i\c{%ifctx}, to
3336 implement a block IF statement as a set of macros.
3352 \c %error "expected `if' before `else'"
3366 \c %error "expected `if' or `else' before `endif'"
3371 This code is more robust than the \c{REPEAT} and \c{UNTIL} macros
3372 given in \k{ctxlocal}, because it uses conditional assembly to check
3373 that the macros are issued in the right order (for example, not
3374 calling \c{endif} before \c{if}) and issues a \c{%error} if they're
3377 In addition, the \c{endif} macro has to be able to cope with the two
3378 distinct cases of either directly following an \c{if}, or following
3379 an \c{else}. It achieves this, again, by using conditional assembly
3380 to do different things depending on whether the context on top of
3381 the stack is \c{if} or \c{else}.
3383 The \c{else} macro has to preserve the context on the stack, in
3384 order to have the \c{%$ifnot} referred to by the \c{if} macro be the
3385 same as the one defined by the \c{endif} macro, but has to change
3386 the context's name so that \c{endif} will know there was an
3387 intervening \c{else}. It does this by the use of \c{%repl}.
3389 A sample usage of these macros might look like:
3411 The block-\c{IF} macros handle nesting quite happily, by means of
3412 pushing another context, describing the inner \c{if}, on top of the
3413 one describing the outer \c{if}; thus \c{else} and \c{endif} always
3414 refer to the last unmatched \c{if} or \c{else}.
3417 \H{stackrel} \i{Stack Relative Preprocessor Directives}
3419 The following preprocessor directives provide a way to use
3420 labels to refer to local variables allocated on the stack.
3422 \b\c{%arg} (see \k{arg})
3424 \b\c{%stacksize} (see \k{stacksize})
3426 \b\c{%local} (see \k{local})
3429 \S{arg} \i\c{%arg} Directive
3431 The \c{%arg} directive is used to simplify the handling of
3432 parameters passed on the stack. Stack based parameter passing
3433 is used by many high level languages, including C, C++ and Pascal.
3435 While NASM has macros which attempt to duplicate this
3436 functionality (see \k{16cmacro}), the syntax is not particularly
3437 convenient to use. and is not TASM compatible. Here is an example
3438 which shows the use of \c{%arg} without any external macros:
3442 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3443 \c %stacksize large ; tell NASM to use bp
3444 \c %arg i:word, j_ptr:word
3451 \c %pop ; restore original context
3453 This is similar to the procedure defined in \k{16cmacro} and adds
3454 the value in i to the value pointed to by j_ptr and returns the
3455 sum in the ax register. See \k{pushpop} for an explanation of
3456 \c{push} and \c{pop} and the use of context stacks.
3459 \S{stacksize} \i\c{%stacksize} Directive
3461 The \c{%stacksize} directive is used in conjunction with the
3462 \c{%arg} (see \k{arg}) and the \c{%local} (see \k{local}) directives.
3463 It tells NASM the default size to use for subsequent \c{%arg} and
3464 \c{%local} directives. The \c{%stacksize} directive takes one
3465 required argument which is one of \c{flat}, \c{flat64}, \c{large} or \c{small}.
3469 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3470 relative to \c{ebp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3471 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{eip} is on the stack).
3473 \c %stacksize flat64
3475 This form causes NASM to use stack-based parameter addressing
3476 relative to \c{rbp} and it assumes that a near form of call was used
3477 to get to this label (i.e. that \c{rip} is on the stack).
3481 This form uses \c{bp} to do stack-based parameter addressing and
3482 assumes that a far form of call was used to get to this address
3483 (i.e. that \c{ip} and \c{cs} are on the stack).
3487 This form also uses \c{bp} to address stack parameters, but it is
3488 different from \c{large} because it also assumes that the old value
3489 of bp is pushed onto the stack (i.e. it expects an \c{ENTER}
3490 instruction). In other words, it expects that \c{bp}, \c{ip} and
3491 \c{cs} are on the top of the stack, underneath any local space which
3492 may have been allocated by \c{ENTER}. This form is probably most
3493 useful when used in combination with the \c{%local} directive
3497 \S{local} \i\c{%local} Directive
3499 The \c{%local} directive is used to simplify the use of local
3500 temporary stack variables allocated in a stack frame. Automatic
3501 local variables in C are an example of this kind of variable. The
3502 \c{%local} directive is most useful when used with the \c{%stacksize}
3503 (see \k{stacksize} and is also compatible with the \c{%arg} directive
3504 (see \k{arg}). It allows simplified reference to variables on the
3505 stack which have been allocated typically by using the \c{ENTER}
3507 \# (see \k{insENTER} for a description of that instruction).
3508 An example of its use is the following:
3512 \c %push mycontext ; save the current context
3513 \c %stacksize small ; tell NASM to use bp
3514 \c %assign %$localsize 0 ; see text for explanation
3515 \c %local old_ax:word, old_dx:word
3517 \c enter %$localsize,0 ; see text for explanation
3518 \c mov [old_ax],ax ; swap ax & bx
3519 \c mov [old_dx],dx ; and swap dx & cx
3524 \c leave ; restore old bp
3527 \c %pop ; restore original context
3529 The \c{%$localsize} variable is used internally by the
3530 \c{%local} directive and \e{must} be defined within the
3531 current context before the \c{%local} directive may be used.
3532 Failure to do so will result in one expression syntax error for
3533 each \c{%local} variable declared. It then may be used in
3534 the construction of an appropriately sized ENTER instruction
3535 as shown in the example.
3538 \H{pperror} Reporting \i{User-Defined Errors}: \i\c{%error}, \i\c{%warning}, \i\c{%fatal}
3540 The preprocessor directive \c{%error} will cause NASM to report an
3541 error if it occurs in assembled code. So if other users are going to
3542 try to assemble your source files, you can ensure that they define the
3543 right macros by means of code like this:
3548 \c ; do some different setup
3550 \c %error "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined."
3553 Then any user who fails to understand the way your code is supposed
3554 to be assembled will be quickly warned of their mistake, rather than
3555 having to wait until the program crashes on being run and then not
3556 knowing what went wrong.
3558 Similarly, \c{%warning} issues a warning, but allows assembly to continue:
3563 \c ; do some different setup
3565 \c %warning "Neither F1 nor F2 was defined, assuming F1."
3569 \c{%error} and \c{%warning} are issued only on the final assembly
3570 pass. This makes them safe to use in conjunction with tests that
3571 depend on symbol values.
3573 \c{%fatal} terminates assembly immediately, regardless of pass. This
3574 is useful when there is no point in continuing the assembly further,
3575 and doing so is likely just going to cause a spew of confusing error
3578 It is optional for the message string after \c{%error}, \c{%warning}
3579 or \c{%fatal} to be quoted. If it is \e{not}, then single-line macros
3580 are expanded in it, which can be used to display more information to
3581 the user. For example:
3584 \c %assign foo_over foo-64
3585 \c %error foo is foo_over bytes too large
3589 \H{otherpreproc} \i{Other Preprocessor Directives}
3591 NASM also has preprocessor directives which allow access to
3592 information from external sources. Currently they include:
3594 \b\c{%line} enables NASM to correctly handle the output of another
3595 preprocessor (see \k{line}).
3597 \b\c{%!} enables NASM to read in the value of an environment variable,
3598 which can then be used in your program (see \k{getenv}).
3600 \S{line} \i\c{%line} Directive
3602 The \c{%line} directive is used to notify NASM that the input line
3603 corresponds to a specific line number in another file. Typically
3604 this other file would be an original source file, with the current
3605 NASM input being the output of a pre-processor. The \c{%line}
3606 directive allows NASM to output messages which indicate the line
3607 number of the original source file, instead of the file that is being
3610 This preprocessor directive is not generally of use to programmers,
3611 by may be of interest to preprocessor authors. The usage of the
3612 \c{%line} preprocessor directive is as follows:
3614 \c %line nnn[+mmm] [filename]
3616 In this directive, \c{nnn} identifies the line of the original source
3617 file which this line corresponds to. \c{mmm} is an optional parameter
3618 which specifies a line increment value; each line of the input file
3619 read in is considered to correspond to \c{mmm} lines of the original
3620 source file. Finally, \c{filename} is an optional parameter which
3621 specifies the file name of the original source file.
3623 After reading a \c{%line} preprocessor directive, NASM will report
3624 all file name and line numbers relative to the values specified
3628 \S{getenv} \i\c{%!}\c{<env>}: Read an environment variable.
3630 The \c{%!<env>} directive makes it possible to read the value of an
3631 environment variable at assembly time. This could, for example, be used
3632 to store the contents of an environment variable into a string, which
3633 could be used at some other point in your code.
3635 For example, suppose that you have an environment variable \c{FOO}, and
3636 you want the contents of \c{FOO} to be embedded in your program. You
3637 could do that as follows:
3639 \c %defstr FOO %!FOO
3641 See \k{defstr} for notes on the \c{%defstr} directive.
3644 \H{stdmac} \i{Standard Macros}
3646 NASM defines a set of standard macros, which are already defined
3647 when it starts to process any source file. If you really need a
3648 program to be assembled with no pre-defined macros, you can use the
3649 \i\c{%clear} directive to empty the preprocessor of everything but
3650 context-local preprocessor variables and single-line macros.
3652 Most \i{user-level assembler directives} (see \k{directive}) are
3653 implemented as macros which invoke primitive directives; these are
3654 described in \k{directive}. The rest of the standard macro set is
3658 \S{stdmacver} \i{NASM Version} Macros
3660 The single-line macros \i\c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \i\c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3661 \i\c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \i\c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} expand to the
3662 major, minor, subminor and patch level parts of the \i{version
3663 number of NASM} being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32p1 for
3664 example, \c{__NASM_MAJOR__} would be defined to be 0, \c{__NASM_MINOR__}
3665 would be defined as 98, \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} would be defined to 32,
3666 and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} would be defined as 1.
3668 Additionally, the macro \i\c{__NASM_SNAPSHOT__} is defined for
3669 automatically generated snapshot releases \e{only}.
3672 \S{stdmacverid} \i\c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__}: \i{NASM Version ID}
3674 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VERSION_ID__} expands to a dword integer
3675 representing the full version number of the version of nasm being used.
3676 The value is the equivalent to \c{__NASM_MAJOR__}, \c{__NASM_MINOR__},
3677 \c{__NASM_SUBMINOR__} and \c{___NASM_PATCHLEVEL__} concatenated to
3678 produce a single doubleword. Hence, for 0.98.32p1, the returned number
3679 would be equivalent to:
3687 Note that the above lines are generate exactly the same code, the second
3688 line is used just to give an indication of the order that the separate
3689 values will be present in memory.
3692 \S{stdmacverstr} \i\c{__NASM_VER__}: \i{NASM Version string}
3694 The single-line macro \c{__NASM_VER__} expands to a string which defines
3695 the version number of nasm being used. So, under NASM 0.98.32 for example,
3704 \S{fileline} \i\c{__FILE__} and \i\c{__LINE__}: File Name and Line Number
3706 Like the C preprocessor, NASM allows the user to find out the file
3707 name and line number containing the current instruction. The macro
3708 \c{__FILE__} expands to a string constant giving the name of the
3709 current input file (which may change through the course of assembly
3710 if \c{%include} directives are used), and \c{__LINE__} expands to a
3711 numeric constant giving the current line number in the input file.
3713 These macros could be used, for example, to communicate debugging
3714 information to a macro, since invoking \c{__LINE__} inside a macro
3715 definition (either single-line or multi-line) will return the line
3716 number of the macro \e{call}, rather than \e{definition}. So to
3717 determine where in a piece of code a crash is occurring, for
3718 example, one could write a routine \c{stillhere}, which is passed a
3719 line number in \c{EAX} and outputs something like `line 155: still
3720 here'. You could then write a macro
3722 \c %macro notdeadyet 0
3731 and then pepper your code with calls to \c{notdeadyet} until you
3732 find the crash point.
3735 \S{bitsm} \i\c{__BITS__}: Current BITS Mode
3737 The \c{__BITS__} standard macro is updated every time that the BITS mode is
3738 set using the \c{BITS XX} or \c{[BITS XX]} directive, where XX is a valid mode
3739 number of 16, 32 or 64. \c{__BITS__} receives the specified mode number and
3740 makes it globally available. This can be very useful for those who utilize
3741 mode-dependent macros.
3743 \S{ofmtm} \i\c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__}: Current Output Format
3745 The \c{__OUTPUT_FORMAT__} standard macro holds the current Output Format,
3746 as given by the \c{-f} option or NASM's default. Type \c{nasm -hf} for a
3749 \c %ifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, win32
3750 \c %define NEWLINE 13, 10
3751 \c %elifidn __OUTPUT_FORMAT__, elf32
3752 \c %define NEWLINE 10
3756 \S{datetime} Assembly Date and Time Macros
3758 NASM provides a variety of macros that represent the timestamp of the
3761 \b The \i\c{__DATE__} and \i\c{__TIME__} macros give the assembly date and
3762 time as strings, in ISO 8601 format (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"},
3765 \b The \i\c{__DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__TIME_NUM__} macros give the assembly
3766 date and time in numeric form; in the format \c{YYYYMMDD} and
3767 \c{HHMMSS} respectively.
3769 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME__} macros give the assembly
3770 date and time in universal time (UTC) as strings, in ISO 8601 format
3771 (\c{"YYYY-MM-DD"} and \c{"HH:MM:SS"}, respectively.) If the host
3772 platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are undefined.
3774 \b The \i\c{__UTC_DATE_NUM__} and \i\c{__UTC_TIME_NUM__} macros give the
3775 assembly date and time universal time (UTC) in numeric form; in the
3776 format \c{YYYYMMDD} and \c{HHMMSS} respectively. If the
3777 host platform doesn't provide UTC time, these macros are
3780 \b The \c{__POSIX_TIME__} macro is defined as a number containing the
3781 number of seconds since the POSIX epoch, 1 January 1970 00:00:00 UTC;
3782 excluding any leap seconds. This is computed using UTC time if
3783 available on the host platform, otherwise it is computed using the
3784 local time as if it was UTC.
3786 All instances of time and date macros in the same assembly session
3787 produce consistent output. For example, in an assembly session
3788 started at 42 seconds after midnight on January 1, 2010 in Moscow
3789 (timezone UTC+3) these macros would have the following values,
3790 assuming, of course, a properly configured environment with a correct
3793 \c __DATE__ "2010-01-01"
3794 \c __TIME__ "00:00:42"
3795 \c __DATE_NUM__ 20100101
3796 \c __TIME_NUM__ 000042
3797 \c __UTC_DATE__ "2009-12-31"
3798 \c __UTC_TIME__ "21:00:42"
3799 \c __UTC_DATE_NUM__ 20091231
3800 \c __UTC_TIME_NUM__ 210042
3801 \c __POSIX_TIME__ 1262293242
3804 \S{use_def} \I\c{__USE_*__}\c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__}: Package
3807 When a standard macro package (see \k{macropkg}) is included with the
3808 \c{%use} directive (see \k{use}), a single-line macro of the form
3809 \c{__USE_}\e{package}\c{__} is automatically defined. This allows
3810 testing if a particular package is invoked or not.
3812 For example, if the \c{altreg} package is included (see
3813 \k{pkg_altreg}), then the macro \c{__USE_ALTREG__} is defined.
3816 \S{pass_macro} \i\c{__PASS__}: Assembly Pass
3818 The macro \c{__PASS__} is defined to be \c{1} on preparatory passes,
3819 and \c{2} on the final pass. In preprocess-only mode, it is set to
3820 \c{3}, and when running only to generate dependencies (due to the
3821 \c{-M} or \c{-MG} option, see \k{opt-M}) it is set to \c{0}.
3823 \e{Avoid using this macro if at all possible. It is tremendously easy
3824 to generate very strange errors by misusing it, and the semantics may
3825 change in future versions of NASM.}
3828 \S{struc} \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC}: \i{Declaring Structure} Data Types
3830 The core of NASM contains no intrinsic means of defining data
3831 structures; instead, the preprocessor is sufficiently powerful that
3832 data structures can be implemented as a set of macros. The macros
3833 \c{STRUC} and \c{ENDSTRUC} are used to define a structure data type.
3835 \c{STRUC} takes one or two parameters. The first parameter is the name
3836 of the data type. The second, optional parameter is the base offset of
3837 the structure. The name of the data type is defined as a symbol with
3838 the value of the base offset, and the name of the data type with the
3839 suffix \c{_size} appended to it is defined as an \c{EQU} giving the
3840 size of the structure. Once \c{STRUC} has been issued, you are
3841 defining the structure, and should define fields using the \c{RESB}
3842 family of pseudo-instructions, and then invoke \c{ENDSTRUC} to finish
3845 For example, to define a structure called \c{mytype} containing a
3846 longword, a word, a byte and a string of bytes, you might code
3857 The above code defines six symbols: \c{mt_long} as 0 (the offset
3858 from the beginning of a \c{mytype} structure to the longword field),
3859 \c{mt_word} as 4, \c{mt_byte} as 6, \c{mt_str} as 7, \c{mytype_size}
3860 as 39, and \c{mytype} itself as zero.
3862 The reason why the structure type name is defined at zero by default
3863 is a side effect of allowing structures to work with the local label
3864 mechanism: if your structure members tend to have the same names in
3865 more than one structure, you can define the above structure like this:
3876 This defines the offsets to the structure fields as \c{mytype.long},
3877 \c{mytype.word}, \c{mytype.byte} and \c{mytype.str}.
3879 NASM, since it has no \e{intrinsic} structure support, does not
3880 support any form of period notation to refer to the elements of a
3881 structure once you have one (except the above local-label notation),
3882 so code such as \c{mov ax,[mystruc.mt_word]} is not valid.
3883 \c{mt_word} is a constant just like any other constant, so the
3884 correct syntax is \c{mov ax,[mystruc+mt_word]} or \c{mov
3885 ax,[mystruc+mytype.word]}.
3887 Sometimes you only have the address of the structure displaced by an
3888 offset. For example, consider this standard stack frame setup:
3894 In this case, you could access an element by subtracting the offset:
3896 \c mov [ebp - 40 + mytype.word], ax
3898 However, if you do not want to repeat this offset, you can use -40 as
3901 \c struc mytype, -40
3903 And access an element this way:
3905 \c mov [ebp + mytype.word], ax
3908 \S{istruc} \i\c{ISTRUC}, \i\c{AT} and \i\c{IEND}: Declaring
3909 \i{Instances of Structures}
3911 Having defined a structure type, the next thing you typically want
3912 to do is to declare instances of that structure in your data
3913 segment. NASM provides an easy way to do this in the \c{ISTRUC}
3914 mechanism. To declare a structure of type \c{mytype} in a program,
3915 you code something like this:
3920 \c at mt_long, dd 123456
3921 \c at mt_word, dw 1024
3922 \c at mt_byte, db 'x'
3923 \c at mt_str, db 'hello, world', 13, 10, 0
3927 The function of the \c{AT} macro is to make use of the \c{TIMES}
3928 prefix to advance the assembly position to the correct point for the
3929 specified structure field, and then to declare the specified data.
3930 Therefore the structure fields must be declared in the same order as
3931 they were specified in the structure definition.
3933 If the data to go in a structure field requires more than one source
3934 line to specify, the remaining source lines can easily come after
3935 the \c{AT} line. For example:
3937 \c at mt_str, db 123,134,145,156,167,178,189
3940 Depending on personal taste, you can also omit the code part of the
3941 \c{AT} line completely, and start the structure field on the next
3945 \c db 'hello, world'
3949 \S{align} \i\c{ALIGN} and \i\c{ALIGNB}: Data Alignment
3951 The \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros provides a convenient way to
3952 align code or data on a word, longword, paragraph or other boundary.
3953 (Some assemblers call this directive \i\c{EVEN}.) The syntax of the
3954 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} macros is
3956 \c align 4 ; align on 4-byte boundary
3957 \c align 16 ; align on 16-byte boundary
3958 \c align 8,db 0 ; pad with 0s rather than NOPs
3959 \c align 4,resb 1 ; align to 4 in the BSS
3960 \c alignb 4 ; equivalent to previous line
3962 Both macros require their first argument to be a power of two; they
3963 both compute the number of additional bytes required to bring the
3964 length of the current section up to a multiple of that power of two,
3965 and then apply the \c{TIMES} prefix to their second argument to
3966 perform the alignment.
3968 If the second argument is not specified, the default for \c{ALIGN}
3969 is \c{NOP}, and the default for \c{ALIGNB} is \c{RESB 1}. So if the
3970 second argument is specified, the two macros are equivalent.
3971 Normally, you can just use \c{ALIGN} in code and data sections and
3972 \c{ALIGNB} in BSS sections, and never need the second argument
3973 except for special purposes.
3975 \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB}, being simple macros, perform no error
3976 checking: they cannot warn you if their first argument fails to be a
3977 power of two, or if their second argument generates more than one
3978 byte of code. In each of these cases they will silently do the wrong
3981 \c{ALIGNB} (or \c{ALIGN} with a second argument of \c{RESB 1}) can
3982 be used within structure definitions:
3999 This will ensure that the structure members are sensibly aligned
4000 relative to the base of the structure.
4002 A final caveat: \c{ALIGN} and \c{ALIGNB} work relative to the
4003 beginning of the \e{section}, not the beginning of the address space
4004 in the final executable. Aligning to a 16-byte boundary when the
4005 section you're in is only guaranteed to be aligned to a 4-byte
4006 boundary, for example, is a waste of effort. Again, NASM does not
4007 check that the section's alignment characteristics are sensible for
4008 the use of \c{ALIGN} or \c{ALIGNB}.
4010 See also the \c{smartalign} standard macro package, \k{pkg_smartalign}.
4013 \C{macropkg} \i{Standard Macro Packages}
4015 The \i\c{%use} directive (see \k{use}) includes one of the standard
4016 macro packages included with the NASM distribution and compiled into
4017 the NASM binary. It operates like the \c{%include} directive (see
4018 \k{include}), but the included contents is provided by NASM itself.
4020 The names of standard macro packages are case insensitive, and can be
4024 \H{pkg_altreg} \i\c{altreg}: \i{Alternate Register Names}
4026 The \c{altreg} standard macro package provides alternate register
4027 names. It provides numeric register names for all registers (not just
4028 \c{R8}-\c{R15}), the Intel-defined aliases \c{R8L}-\c{R15L} for the
4029 low bytes of register (as opposed to the NASM/AMD standard names
4030 \c{R8B}-\c{R15B}), and the names \c{R0H}-\c{R3H} (by analogy with
4031 \c{R0L}-\c{R3L}) for \c{AH}, \c{CH}, \c{DH}, and \c{BH}.
4038 \c mov r0l,r3h ; mov al,bh
4044 \H{pkg_smartalign} \i\c{smartalign}\I{align, smart}: Smart \c{ALIGN} Macro
4046 The \c{smartalign} standard macro package provides for an \i\c{ALIGN}
4047 macro which is more powerful than the default (and
4048 backwards-compatible) one (see \k{align}). When the \c{smartalign}
4049 package is enabled, when \c{ALIGN} is used without a second argument,
4050 NASM will generate a sequence of instructions more efficient than a
4051 series of \c{NOP}. Furthermore, if the padding exceeds a specific
4052 threshold, then NASM will generate a jump over the entire padding
4055 The specific instructions generated can be controlled with the
4056 new \i\c{ALIGNMODE} macro. This macro takes two parameters: one mode,
4057 and an optional jump threshold override. The modes are as
4060 \b \c{generic}: Works on all x86 CPUs and should have reasonable
4061 performance. The default jump threshold is 8. This is the
4064 \b \c{nop}: Pad out with \c{NOP} instructions. The only difference
4065 compared to the standard \c{ALIGN} macro is that NASM can still jump
4066 over a large padding area. The default jump threshold is 16.
4068 \b \c{k7}: Optimize for the AMD K7 (Athlon/Althon XP). These
4069 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4072 \b \c{k8}: Optimize for the AMD K8 (Opteron/Althon 64). These
4073 instructions should still work on all x86 CPUs. The default jump
4076 \b \c{p6}: Optimize for Intel CPUs. This uses the long \c{NOP}
4077 instructions first introduced in Pentium Pro. This is incompatible
4078 with all CPUs of family 5 or lower, as well as some VIA CPUs and
4079 several virtualization solutions. The default jump threshold is 16.
4081 The macro \i\c{__ALIGNMODE__} is defined to contain the current
4082 alignment mode. A number of other macros beginning with \c{__ALIGN_}
4083 are used internally by this macro package.
4086 \C{directive} \i{Assembler Directives}
4088 NASM, though it attempts to avoid the bureaucracy of assemblers like
4089 MASM and TASM, is nevertheless forced to support a \e{few}
4090 directives. These are described in this chapter.
4092 NASM's directives come in two types: \I{user-level
4093 directives}\e{user-level} directives and \I{primitive
4094 directives}\e{primitive} directives. Typically, each directive has a
4095 user-level form and a primitive form. In almost all cases, we
4096 recommend that users use the user-level forms of the directives,
4097 which are implemented as macros which call the primitive forms.
4099 Primitive directives are enclosed in square brackets; user-level
4102 In addition to the universal directives described in this chapter,
4103 each object file format can optionally supply extra directives in
4104 order to control particular features of that file format. These
4105 \I{format-specific directives}\e{format-specific} directives are
4106 documented along with the formats that implement them, in \k{outfmt}.
4109 \H{bits} \i\c{BITS}: Specifying Target \i{Processor Mode}
4111 The \c{BITS} directive specifies whether NASM should generate code
4112 \I{16-bit mode, versus 32-bit mode}designed to run on a processor
4113 operating in 16-bit mode, 32-bit mode or 64-bit mode. The syntax is
4114 \c{BITS XX}, where XX is 16, 32 or 64.
4116 In most cases, you should not need to use \c{BITS} explicitly. The
4117 \c{aout}, \c{coff}, \c{elf}, \c{macho}, \c{win32} and \c{win64}
4118 object formats, which are designed for use in 32-bit or 64-bit
4119 operating systems, all cause NASM to select 32-bit or 64-bit mode,
4120 respectively, by default. The \c{obj} object format allows you
4121 to specify each segment you define as either \c{USE16} or \c{USE32},
4122 and NASM will set its operating mode accordingly, so the use of the
4123 \c{BITS} directive is once again unnecessary.
4125 The most likely reason for using the \c{BITS} directive is to write
4126 32-bit or 64-bit code in a flat binary file; this is because the \c{bin}
4127 output format defaults to 16-bit mode in anticipation of it being
4128 used most frequently to write DOS \c{.COM} programs, DOS \c{.SYS}
4129 device drivers and boot loader software.
4131 You do \e{not} need to specify \c{BITS 32} merely in order to use
4132 32-bit instructions in a 16-bit DOS program; if you do, the
4133 assembler will generate incorrect code because it will be writing
4134 code targeted at a 32-bit platform, to be run on a 16-bit one.
4136 When NASM is in \c{BITS 16} mode, instructions which use 32-bit
4137 data are prefixed with an 0x66 byte, and those referring to 32-bit
4138 addresses have an 0x67 prefix. In \c{BITS 32} mode, the reverse is
4139 true: 32-bit instructions require no prefixes, whereas instructions
4140 using 16-bit data need an 0x66 and those working on 16-bit addresses
4143 When NASM is in \c{BITS 64} mode, most instructions operate the same
4144 as they do for \c{BITS 32} mode. However, there are 8 more general and
4145 SSE registers, and 16-bit addressing is no longer supported.
4147 The default address size is 64 bits; 32-bit addressing can be selected
4148 with the 0x67 prefix. The default operand size is still 32 bits,
4149 however, and the 0x66 prefix selects 16-bit operand size. The \c{REX}
4150 prefix is used both to select 64-bit operand size, and to access the
4151 new registers. NASM automatically inserts REX prefixes when
4154 When the \c{REX} prefix is used, the processor does not know how to
4155 address the AH, BH, CH or DH (high 8-bit legacy) registers. Instead,
4156 it is possible to access the the low 8-bits of the SP, BP SI and DI
4157 registers as SPL, BPL, SIL and DIL, respectively; but only when the
4160 The \c{BITS} directive has an exactly equivalent primitive form,
4161 \c{[BITS 16]}, \c{[BITS 32]} and \c{[BITS 64]}. The user-level form is
4162 a macro which has no function other than to call the primitive form.
4164 Note that the space is neccessary, e.g. \c{BITS32} will \e{not} work!
4166 \S{USE16 & USE32} \i\c{USE16} & \i\c{USE32}: Aliases for BITS
4168 The `\c{USE16}' and `\c{USE32}' directives can be used in place of
4169 `\c{BITS 16}' and `\c{BITS 32}', for compatibility with other assemblers.
4172 \H{default} \i\c{DEFAULT}: Change the assembler defaults
4174 The \c{DEFAULT} directive changes the assembler defaults. Normally,
4175 NASM defaults to a mode where the programmer is expected to explicitly
4176 specify most features directly. However, this is occationally
4177 obnoxious, as the explicit form is pretty much the only one one wishes
4180 Currently, the only \c{DEFAULT} that is settable is whether or not
4181 registerless instructions in 64-bit mode are \c{RIP}-relative or not.
4182 By default, they are absolute unless overridden with the \i\c{REL}
4183 specifier (see \k{effaddr}). However, if \c{DEFAULT REL} is
4184 specified, \c{REL} is default, unless overridden with the \c{ABS}
4185 specifier, \e{except when used with an FS or GS segment override}.
4187 The special handling of \c{FS} and \c{GS} overrides are due to the
4188 fact that these registers are generally used as thread pointers or
4189 other special functions in 64-bit mode, and generating
4190 \c{RIP}-relative addresses would be extremely confusing.
4192 \c{DEFAULT REL} is disabled with \c{DEFAULT ABS}.
4194 \H{section} \i\c{SECTION} or \i\c{SEGMENT}: Changing and \i{Defining
4197 \I{changing sections}\I{switching between sections}The \c{SECTION}
4198 directive (\c{SEGMENT} is an exactly equivalent synonym) changes
4199 which section of the output file the code you write will be
4200 assembled into. In some object file formats, the number and names of
4201 sections are fixed; in others, the user may make up as many as they
4202 wish. Hence \c{SECTION} may sometimes give an error message, or may
4203 define a new section, if you try to switch to a section that does
4206 The Unix object formats, and the \c{bin} object format (but see
4207 \k{multisec}, all support
4208 the \i{standardized section names} \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}
4209 for the code, data and uninitialized-data sections. The \c{obj}
4210 format, by contrast, does not recognize these section names as being
4211 special, and indeed will strip off the leading period of any section
4215 \S{sectmac} The \i\c{__SECT__} Macro
4217 The \c{SECTION} directive is unusual in that its user-level form
4218 functions differently from its primitive form. The primitive form,
4219 \c{[SECTION xyz]}, simply switches the current target section to the
4220 one given. The user-level form, \c{SECTION xyz}, however, first
4221 defines the single-line macro \c{__SECT__} to be the primitive
4222 \c{[SECTION]} directive which it is about to issue, and then issues
4223 it. So the user-level directive
4227 expands to the two lines
4229 \c %define __SECT__ [SECTION .text]
4232 Users may find it useful to make use of this in their own macros.
4233 For example, the \c{writefile} macro defined in \k{mlmacgre} can be
4234 usefully rewritten in the following more sophisticated form:
4236 \c %macro writefile 2+
4246 \c mov cx,%%endstr-%%str
4253 This form of the macro, once passed a string to output, first
4254 switches temporarily to the data section of the file, using the
4255 primitive form of the \c{SECTION} directive so as not to modify
4256 \c{__SECT__}. It then declares its string in the data section, and
4257 then invokes \c{__SECT__} to switch back to \e{whichever} section
4258 the user was previously working in. It thus avoids the need, in the
4259 previous version of the macro, to include a \c{JMP} instruction to
4260 jump over the data, and also does not fail if, in a complicated
4261 \c{OBJ} format module, the user could potentially be assembling the
4262 code in any of several separate code sections.
4265 \H{absolute} \i\c{ABSOLUTE}: Defining Absolute Labels
4267 The \c{ABSOLUTE} directive can be thought of as an alternative form
4268 of \c{SECTION}: it causes the subsequent code to be directed at no
4269 physical section, but at the hypothetical section starting at the
4270 given absolute address. The only instructions you can use in this
4271 mode are the \c{RESB} family.
4273 \c{ABSOLUTE} is used as follows:
4281 This example describes a section of the PC BIOS data area, at
4282 segment address 0x40: the above code defines \c{kbuf_chr} to be
4283 0x1A, \c{kbuf_free} to be 0x1C, and \c{kbuf} to be 0x1E.
4285 The user-level form of \c{ABSOLUTE}, like that of \c{SECTION},
4286 redefines the \i\c{__SECT__} macro when it is invoked.
4288 \i\c{STRUC} and \i\c{ENDSTRUC} are defined as macros which use
4289 \c{ABSOLUTE} (and also \c{__SECT__}).
4291 \c{ABSOLUTE} doesn't have to take an absolute constant as an
4292 argument: it can take an expression (actually, a \i{critical
4293 expression}: see \k{crit}) and it can be a value in a segment. For
4294 example, a TSR can re-use its setup code as run-time BSS like this:
4296 \c org 100h ; it's a .COM program
4298 \c jmp setup ; setup code comes last
4300 \c ; the resident part of the TSR goes here
4302 \c ; now write the code that installs the TSR here
4306 \c runtimevar1 resw 1
4307 \c runtimevar2 resd 20
4311 This defines some variables `on top of' the setup code, so that
4312 after the setup has finished running, the space it took up can be
4313 re-used as data storage for the running TSR. The symbol `tsr_end'
4314 can be used to calculate the total size of the part of the TSR that
4315 needs to be made resident.
4318 \H{extern} \i\c{EXTERN}: \i{Importing Symbols} from Other Modules
4320 \c{EXTERN} is similar to the MASM directive \c{EXTRN} and the C
4321 keyword \c{extern}: it is used to declare a symbol which is not
4322 defined anywhere in the module being assembled, but is assumed to be
4323 defined in some other module and needs to be referred to by this
4324 one. Not every object-file format can support external variables:
4325 the \c{bin} format cannot.
4327 The \c{EXTERN} directive takes as many arguments as you like. Each
4328 argument is the name of a symbol:
4331 \c extern _sscanf,_fscanf
4333 Some object-file formats provide extra features to the \c{EXTERN}
4334 directive. In all cases, the extra features are used by suffixing a
4335 colon to the symbol name followed by object-format specific text.
4336 For example, the \c{obj} format allows you to declare that the
4337 default segment base of an external should be the group \c{dgroup}
4338 by means of the directive
4340 \c extern _variable:wrt dgroup
4342 The primitive form of \c{EXTERN} differs from the user-level form
4343 only in that it can take only one argument at a time: the support
4344 for multiple arguments is implemented at the preprocessor level.
4346 You can declare the same variable as \c{EXTERN} more than once: NASM
4347 will quietly ignore the second and later redeclarations. You can't
4348 declare a variable as \c{EXTERN} as well as something else, though.
4351 \H{global} \i\c{GLOBAL}: \i{Exporting Symbols} to Other Modules
4353 \c{GLOBAL} is the other end of \c{EXTERN}: if one module declares a
4354 symbol as \c{EXTERN} and refers to it, then in order to prevent
4355 linker errors, some other module must actually \e{define} the
4356 symbol and declare it as \c{GLOBAL}. Some assemblers use the name
4357 \i\c{PUBLIC} for this purpose.
4359 The \c{GLOBAL} directive applying to a symbol must appear \e{before}
4360 the definition of the symbol.
4362 \c{GLOBAL} uses the same syntax as \c{EXTERN}, except that it must
4363 refer to symbols which \e{are} defined in the same module as the
4364 \c{GLOBAL} directive. For example:
4370 \c{GLOBAL}, like \c{EXTERN}, allows object formats to define private
4371 extensions by means of a colon. The \c{elf} object format, for
4372 example, lets you specify whether global data items are functions or
4375 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
4377 Like \c{EXTERN}, the primitive form of \c{GLOBAL} differs from the
4378 user-level form only in that it can take only one argument at a
4382 \H{common} \i\c{COMMON}: Defining Common Data Areas
4384 The \c{COMMON} directive is used to declare \i\e{common variables}.
4385 A common variable is much like a global variable declared in the
4386 uninitialized data section, so that
4390 is similar in function to
4397 The difference is that if more than one module defines the same
4398 common variable, then at link time those variables will be
4399 \e{merged}, and references to \c{intvar} in all modules will point
4400 at the same piece of memory.
4402 Like \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN}, \c{COMMON} supports object-format
4403 specific extensions. For example, the \c{obj} format allows common
4404 variables to be NEAR or FAR, and the \c{elf} format allows you to
4405 specify the alignment requirements of a common variable:
4407 \c common commvar 4:near ; works in OBJ
4408 \c common intarray 100:4 ; works in ELF: 4 byte aligned
4410 Once again, like \c{EXTERN} and \c{GLOBAL}, the primitive form of
4411 \c{COMMON} differs from the user-level form only in that it can take
4412 only one argument at a time.
4415 \H{CPU} \i\c{CPU}: Defining CPU Dependencies
4417 The \i\c{CPU} directive restricts assembly to those instructions which
4418 are available on the specified CPU.
4422 \b\c{CPU 8086} Assemble only 8086 instruction set
4424 \b\c{CPU 186} Assemble instructions up to the 80186 instruction set
4426 \b\c{CPU 286} Assemble instructions up to the 286 instruction set
4428 \b\c{CPU 386} Assemble instructions up to the 386 instruction set
4430 \b\c{CPU 486} 486 instruction set
4432 \b\c{CPU 586} Pentium instruction set
4434 \b\c{CPU PENTIUM} Same as 586
4436 \b\c{CPU 686} P6 instruction set
4438 \b\c{CPU PPRO} Same as 686
4440 \b\c{CPU P2} Same as 686
4442 \b\c{CPU P3} Pentium III (Katmai) instruction sets
4444 \b\c{CPU KATMAI} Same as P3
4446 \b\c{CPU P4} Pentium 4 (Willamette) instruction set
4448 \b\c{CPU WILLAMETTE} Same as P4
4450 \b\c{CPU PRESCOTT} Prescott instruction set
4452 \b\c{CPU X64} x86-64 (x64/AMD64/Intel 64) instruction set
4454 \b\c{CPU IA64} IA64 CPU (in x86 mode) instruction set
4456 All options are case insensitive. All instructions will be selected
4457 only if they apply to the selected CPU or lower. By default, all
4458 instructions are available.
4461 \H{FLOAT} \i\c{FLOAT}: Handling of \I{floating-point, constants}floating-point constants
4463 By default, floating-point constants are rounded to nearest, and IEEE
4464 denormals are supported. The following options can be set to alter
4467 \b\c{FLOAT DAZ} Flush denormals to zero
4469 \b\c{FLOAT NODAZ} Do not flush denormals to zero (default)
4471 \b\c{FLOAT NEAR} Round to nearest (default)
4473 \b\c{FLOAT UP} Round up (toward +Infinity)
4475 \b\c{FLOAT DOWN} Round down (toward -Infinity)
4477 \b\c{FLOAT ZERO} Round toward zero
4479 \b\c{FLOAT DEFAULT} Restore default settings
4481 The standard macros \i\c{__FLOAT_DAZ__}, \i\c{__FLOAT_ROUND__}, and
4482 \i\c{__FLOAT__} contain the current state, as long as the programmer
4483 has avoided the use of the brackeded primitive form, (\c{[FLOAT]}).
4485 \c{__FLOAT__} contains the full set of floating-point settings; this
4486 value can be saved away and invoked later to restore the setting.
4489 \C{outfmt} \i{Output Formats}
4491 NASM is a portable assembler, designed to be able to compile on any
4492 ANSI C-supporting platform and produce output to run on a variety of
4493 Intel x86 operating systems. For this reason, it has a large number
4494 of available output formats, selected using the \i\c{-f} option on
4495 the NASM \i{command line}. Each of these formats, along with its
4496 extensions to the base NASM syntax, is detailed in this chapter.
4498 As stated in \k{opt-o}, NASM chooses a \i{default name} for your
4499 output file based on the input file name and the chosen output
4500 format. This will be generated by removing the \i{extension}
4501 (\c{.asm}, \c{.s}, or whatever you like to use) from the input file
4502 name, and substituting an extension defined by the output format.
4503 The extensions are given with each format below.
4506 \H{binfmt} \i\c{bin}: \i{Flat-Form Binary}\I{pure binary} Output
4508 The \c{bin} format does not produce object files: it generates
4509 nothing in the output file except the code you wrote. Such `pure
4510 binary' files are used by \i{MS-DOS}: \i\c{.COM} executables and
4511 \i\c{.SYS} device drivers are pure binary files. Pure binary output
4512 is also useful for \i{operating system} and \i{boot loader}
4515 The \c{bin} format supports \i{multiple section names}. For details of
4516 how NASM handles sections in the \c{bin} format, see \k{multisec}.
4518 Using the \c{bin} format puts NASM by default into 16-bit mode (see
4519 \k{bits}). In order to use \c{bin} to write 32-bit or 64-bit code,
4520 such as an OS kernel, you need to explicitly issue the \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 32}
4521 or \I\c{BITS}\c{BITS 64} directive.
4523 \c{bin} has no default output file name extension: instead, it
4524 leaves your file name as it is once the original extension has been
4525 removed. Thus, the default is for NASM to assemble \c{binprog.asm}
4526 into a binary file called \c{binprog}.
4529 \S{org} \i\c{ORG}: Binary File \i{Program Origin}
4531 The \c{bin} format provides an additional directive to the list
4532 given in \k{directive}: \c{ORG}. The function of the \c{ORG}
4533 directive is to specify the origin address which NASM will assume
4534 the program begins at when it is loaded into memory.
4536 For example, the following code will generate the longword
4543 Unlike the \c{ORG} directive provided by MASM-compatible assemblers,
4544 which allows you to jump around in the object file and overwrite
4545 code you have already generated, NASM's \c{ORG} does exactly what
4546 the directive says: \e{origin}. Its sole function is to specify one
4547 offset which is added to all internal address references within the
4548 section; it does not permit any of the trickery that MASM's version
4549 does. See \k{proborg} for further comments.
4552 \S{binseg} \c{bin} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
4553 Directive\I{SECTION, bin extensions to}
4555 The \c{bin} output format extends the \c{SECTION} (or \c{SEGMENT})
4556 directive to allow you to specify the alignment requirements of
4557 segments. This is done by appending the \i\c{ALIGN} qualifier to the
4558 end of the section-definition line. For example,
4560 \c section .data align=16
4562 switches to the section \c{.data} and also specifies that it must be
4563 aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4565 The parameter to \c{ALIGN} specifies how many low bits of the
4566 section start address must be forced to zero. The alignment value
4567 given may be any power of two.\I{section alignment, in
4568 bin}\I{segment alignment, in bin}\I{alignment, in bin sections}
4571 \S{multisec} \i{Multisection}\I{bin, multisection} Support for the \c{bin} Format
4573 The \c{bin} format allows the use of multiple sections, of arbitrary names,
4574 besides the "known" \c{.text}, \c{.data}, and \c{.bss} names.
4576 \b Sections may be designated \i\c{progbits} or \i\c{nobits}. Default
4577 is \c{progbits} (except \c{.bss}, which defaults to \c{nobits},
4580 \b Sections can be aligned at a specified boundary following the previous
4581 section with \c{align=}, or at an arbitrary byte-granular position with
4584 \b Sections can be given a virtual start address, which will be used
4585 for the calculation of all memory references within that section
4588 \b Sections can be ordered using \i\c{follows=}\c{<section>} or
4589 \i\c{vfollows=}\c{<section>} as an alternative to specifying an explicit
4592 \b Arguments to \c{org}, \c{start}, \c{vstart}, and \c{align=} are
4593 critical expressions. See \k{crit}. E.g. \c{align=(1 << ALIGN_SHIFT)}
4594 - \c{ALIGN_SHIFT} must be defined before it is used here.
4596 \b Any code which comes before an explicit \c{SECTION} directive
4597 is directed by default into the \c{.text} section.
4599 \b If an \c{ORG} statement is not given, \c{ORG 0} is used
4602 \b The \c{.bss} section will be placed after the last \c{progbits}
4603 section, unless \c{start=}, \c{vstart=}, \c{follows=}, or \c{vfollows=}
4606 \b All sections are aligned on dword boundaries, unless a different
4607 alignment has been specified.
4609 \b Sections may not overlap.
4611 \b NASM creates the \c{section.<secname>.start} for each section,
4612 which may be used in your code.
4614 \S{map}\i{Map Files}
4616 Map files can be generated in \c{-f bin} format by means of the \c{[map]}
4617 option. Map types of \c{all} (default), \c{brief}, \c{sections}, \c{segments},
4618 or \c{symbols} may be specified. Output may be directed to \c{stdout}
4619 (default), \c{stderr}, or a specified file. E.g.
4620 \c{[map symbols myfile.map]}. No "user form" exists, the square
4621 brackets must be used.
4624 \H{ithfmt} \i\c{ith}: \i{Intel Hex} Output
4626 The \c{ith} file format produces Intel hex-format files. Just as the
4627 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4628 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4631 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4632 the \c{ith} file format.
4634 \c{ith} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.ith}.
4637 \H{srecfmt} \i\c{srec}: \i{Motorola S-Records} Output
4639 The \c{srec} file format produces Motorola S-records files. Just as the
4640 \c{bin} format, this is a flat memory image format with no support for
4641 relocation or linking. It is usually used with ROM programmers and
4644 All extensions supported by the \c{bin} file format is also supported by
4645 the \c{srec} file format.
4647 \c{srec} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.srec}.
4650 \H{objfmt} \i\c{obj}: \i{Microsoft OMF}\I{OMF} Object Files
4652 The \c{obj} file format (NASM calls it \c{obj} rather than \c{omf}
4653 for historical reasons) is the one produced by \i{MASM} and
4654 \i{TASM}, which is typically fed to 16-bit DOS linkers to produce
4655 \i\c{.EXE} files. It is also the format used by \i{OS/2}.
4657 \c{obj} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4659 \c{obj} is not exclusively a 16-bit format, though: NASM has full
4660 support for the 32-bit extensions to the format. In particular,
4661 32-bit \c{obj} format files are used by \i{Borland's Win32
4662 compilers}, instead of using Microsoft's newer \i\c{win32} object
4665 The \c{obj} format does not define any special segment names: you
4666 can call your segments anything you like. Typical names for segments
4667 in \c{obj} format files are \c{CODE}, \c{DATA} and \c{BSS}.
4669 If your source file contains code before specifying an explicit
4670 \c{SEGMENT} directive, then NASM will invent its own segment called
4671 \i\c{__NASMDEFSEG} for you.
4673 When you define a segment in an \c{obj} file, NASM defines the
4674 segment name as a symbol as well, so that you can access the segment
4675 address of the segment. So, for example:
4684 \c mov ax,data ; get segment address of data
4685 \c mov ds,ax ; and move it into DS
4686 \c inc word [dvar] ; now this reference will work
4689 The \c{obj} format also enables the use of the \i\c{SEG} and
4690 \i\c{WRT} operators, so that you can write code which does things
4695 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment of foo
4697 \c mov ax,data ; a different segment
4699 \c mov ax,[ds:foo] ; this accesses `foo'
4700 \c mov [es:foo wrt data],bx ; so does this
4703 \S{objseg} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{SEGMENT}
4704 Directive\I{SEGMENT, obj extensions to}
4706 The \c{obj} output format extends the \c{SEGMENT} (or \c{SECTION})
4707 directive to allow you to specify various properties of the segment
4708 you are defining. This is done by appending extra qualifiers to the
4709 end of the segment-definition line. For example,
4711 \c segment code private align=16
4713 defines the segment \c{code}, but also declares it to be a private
4714 segment, and requires that the portion of it described in this code
4715 module must be aligned on a 16-byte boundary.
4717 The available qualifiers are:
4719 \b \i\c{PRIVATE}, \i\c{PUBLIC}, \i\c{COMMON} and \i\c{STACK} specify
4720 the combination characteristics of the segment. \c{PRIVATE} segments
4721 do not get combined with any others by the linker; \c{PUBLIC} and
4722 \c{STACK} segments get concatenated together at link time; and
4723 \c{COMMON} segments all get overlaid on top of each other rather
4724 than stuck end-to-end.
4726 \b \i\c{ALIGN} is used, as shown above, to specify how many low bits
4727 of the segment start address must be forced to zero. The alignment
4728 value given may be any power of two from 1 to 4096; in reality, the
4729 only values supported are 1, 2, 4, 16, 256 and 4096, so if 8 is
4730 specified it will be rounded up to 16, and 32, 64 and 128 will all
4731 be rounded up to 256, and so on. Note that alignment to 4096-byte
4732 boundaries is a \i{PharLap} extension to the format and may not be
4733 supported by all linkers.\I{section alignment, in OBJ}\I{segment
4734 alignment, in OBJ}\I{alignment, in OBJ sections}
4736 \b \i\c{CLASS} can be used to specify the segment class; this feature
4737 indicates to the linker that segments of the same class should be
4738 placed near each other in the output file. The class name can be any
4739 word, e.g. \c{CLASS=CODE}.
4741 \b \i\c{OVERLAY}, like \c{CLASS}, is specified with an arbitrary word
4742 as an argument, and provides overlay information to an
4743 overlay-capable linker.
4745 \b Segments can be declared as \i\c{USE16} or \i\c{USE32}, which has
4746 the effect of recording the choice in the object file and also
4747 ensuring that NASM's default assembly mode when assembling in that
4748 segment is 16-bit or 32-bit respectively.
4750 \b When writing \i{OS/2} object files, you should declare 32-bit
4751 segments as \i\c{FLAT}, which causes the default segment base for
4752 anything in the segment to be the special group \c{FLAT}, and also
4753 defines the group if it is not already defined.
4755 \b The \c{obj} file format also allows segments to be declared as
4756 having a pre-defined absolute segment address, although no linkers
4757 are currently known to make sensible use of this feature;
4758 nevertheless, NASM allows you to declare a segment such as
4759 \c{SEGMENT SCREEN ABSOLUTE=0xB800} if you need to. The \i\c{ABSOLUTE}
4760 and \c{ALIGN} keywords are mutually exclusive.
4762 NASM's default segment attributes are \c{PUBLIC}, \c{ALIGN=1}, no
4763 class, no overlay, and \c{USE16}.
4766 \S{group} \i\c{GROUP}: Defining Groups of Segments\I{segments, groups of}
4768 The \c{obj} format also allows segments to be grouped, so that a
4769 single segment register can be used to refer to all the segments in
4770 a group. NASM therefore supplies the \c{GROUP} directive, whereby
4779 \c ; some uninitialized data
4781 \c group dgroup data bss
4783 which will define a group called \c{dgroup} to contain the segments
4784 \c{data} and \c{bss}. Like \c{SEGMENT}, \c{GROUP} causes the group
4785 name to be defined as a symbol, so that you can refer to a variable
4786 \c{var} in the \c{data} segment as \c{var wrt data} or as \c{var wrt
4787 dgroup}, depending on which segment value is currently in your
4790 If you just refer to \c{var}, however, and \c{var} is declared in a
4791 segment which is part of a group, then NASM will default to giving
4792 you the offset of \c{var} from the beginning of the \e{group}, not
4793 the \e{segment}. Therefore \c{SEG var}, also, will return the group
4794 base rather than the segment base.
4796 NASM will allow a segment to be part of more than one group, but
4797 will generate a warning if you do this. Variables declared in a
4798 segment which is part of more than one group will default to being
4799 relative to the first group that was defined to contain the segment.
4801 A group does not have to contain any segments; you can still make
4802 \c{WRT} references to a group which does not contain the variable
4803 you are referring to. OS/2, for example, defines the special group
4804 \c{FLAT} with no segments in it.
4807 \S{uppercase} \i\c{UPPERCASE}: Disabling Case Sensitivity in Output
4809 Although NASM itself is \i{case sensitive}, some OMF linkers are
4810 not; therefore it can be useful for NASM to output single-case
4811 object files. The \c{UPPERCASE} format-specific directive causes all
4812 segment, group and symbol names that are written to the object file
4813 to be forced to upper case just before being written. Within a
4814 source file, NASM is still case-sensitive; but the object file can
4815 be written entirely in upper case if desired.
4817 \c{UPPERCASE} is used alone on a line; it requires no parameters.
4820 \S{import} \i\c{IMPORT}: Importing DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4821 importing}\I{symbols, importing from DLLs}
4823 The \c{IMPORT} format-specific directive defines a symbol to be
4824 imported from a DLL, for use if you are writing a DLL's \i{import
4825 library} in NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{EXTERN}
4826 as well as using the \c{IMPORT} directive.
4828 The \c{IMPORT} directive takes two required parameters, separated by
4829 white space, which are (respectively) the name of the symbol you
4830 wish to import and the name of the library you wish to import it
4833 \c import WSAStartup wsock32.dll
4835 A third optional parameter gives the name by which the symbol is
4836 known in the library you are importing it from, in case this is not
4837 the same as the name you wish the symbol to be known by to your code
4838 once you have imported it. For example:
4840 \c import asyncsel wsock32.dll WSAAsyncSelect
4843 \S{export} \i\c{EXPORT}: Exporting DLL Symbols\I{DLL symbols,
4844 exporting}\I{symbols, exporting from DLLs}
4846 The \c{EXPORT} format-specific directive defines a global symbol to
4847 be exported as a DLL symbol, for use if you are writing a DLL in
4848 NASM. You still need to declare the symbol as \c{GLOBAL} as well as
4849 using the \c{EXPORT} directive.
4851 \c{EXPORT} takes one required parameter, which is the name of the
4852 symbol you wish to export, as it was defined in your source file. An
4853 optional second parameter (separated by white space from the first)
4854 gives the \e{external} name of the symbol: the name by which you
4855 wish the symbol to be known to programs using the DLL. If this name
4856 is the same as the internal name, you may leave the second parameter
4859 Further parameters can be given to define attributes of the exported
4860 symbol. These parameters, like the second, are separated by white
4861 space. If further parameters are given, the external name must also
4862 be specified, even if it is the same as the internal name. The
4863 available attributes are:
4865 \b \c{resident} indicates that the exported name is to be kept
4866 resident by the system loader. This is an optimisation for
4867 frequently used symbols imported by name.
4869 \b \c{nodata} indicates that the exported symbol is a function which
4870 does not make use of any initialized data.
4872 \b \c{parm=NNN}, where \c{NNN} is an integer, sets the number of
4873 parameter words for the case in which the symbol is a call gate
4874 between 32-bit and 16-bit segments.
4876 \b An attribute which is just a number indicates that the symbol
4877 should be exported with an identifying number (ordinal), and gives
4883 \c export myfunc TheRealMoreFormalLookingFunctionName
4884 \c export myfunc myfunc 1234 ; export by ordinal
4885 \c export myfunc myfunc resident parm=23 nodata
4888 \S{dotdotstart} \i\c{..start}: Defining the \i{Program Entry
4891 \c{OMF} linkers require exactly one of the object files being linked to
4892 define the program entry point, where execution will begin when the
4893 program is run. If the object file that defines the entry point is
4894 assembled using NASM, you specify the entry point by declaring the
4895 special symbol \c{..start} at the point where you wish execution to
4899 \S{objextern} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN}
4900 Directive\I{EXTERN, obj extensions to}
4902 If you declare an external symbol with the directive
4906 then references such as \c{mov ax,foo} will give you the offset of
4907 \c{foo} from its preferred segment base (as specified in whichever
4908 module \c{foo} is actually defined in). So to access the contents of
4909 \c{foo} you will usually need to do something like
4911 \c mov ax,seg foo ; get preferred segment base
4912 \c mov es,ax ; move it into ES
4913 \c mov ax,[es:foo] ; and use offset `foo' from it
4915 This is a little unwieldy, particularly if you know that an external
4916 is going to be accessible from a given segment or group, say
4917 \c{dgroup}. So if \c{DS} already contained \c{dgroup}, you could
4920 \c mov ax,[foo wrt dgroup]
4922 However, having to type this every time you want to access \c{foo}
4923 can be a pain; so NASM allows you to declare \c{foo} in the
4926 \c extern foo:wrt dgroup
4928 This form causes NASM to pretend that the preferred segment base of
4929 \c{foo} is in fact \c{dgroup}; so the expression \c{seg foo} will
4930 now return \c{dgroup}, and the expression \c{foo} is equivalent to
4933 This \I{default-WRT mechanism}default-\c{WRT} mechanism can be used
4934 to make externals appear to be relative to any group or segment in
4935 your program. It can also be applied to common variables: see
4939 \S{objcommon} \c{obj} Extensions to the \c{COMMON}
4940 Directive\I{COMMON, obj extensions to}
4942 The \c{obj} format allows common variables to be either near\I{near
4943 common variables} or far\I{far common variables}; NASM allows you to
4944 specify which your variables should be by the use of the syntax
4946 \c common nearvar 2:near ; `nearvar' is a near common
4947 \c common farvar 10:far ; and `farvar' is far
4949 Far common variables may be greater in size than 64Kb, and so the
4950 OMF specification says that they are declared as a number of
4951 \e{elements} of a given size. So a 10-byte far common variable could
4952 be declared as ten one-byte elements, five two-byte elements, two
4953 five-byte elements or one ten-byte element.
4955 Some \c{OMF} linkers require the \I{element size, in common
4956 variables}\I{common variables, element size}element size, as well as
4957 the variable size, to match when resolving common variables declared
4958 in more than one module. Therefore NASM must allow you to specify
4959 the element size on your far common variables. This is done by the
4962 \c common c_5by2 10:far 5 ; two five-byte elements
4963 \c common c_2by5 10:far 2 ; five two-byte elements
4965 If no element size is specified, the default is 1. Also, the \c{FAR}
4966 keyword is not required when an element size is specified, since
4967 only far commons may have element sizes at all. So the above
4968 declarations could equivalently be
4970 \c common c_5by2 10:5 ; two five-byte elements
4971 \c common c_2by5 10:2 ; five two-byte elements
4973 In addition to these extensions, the \c{COMMON} directive in \c{obj}
4974 also supports default-\c{WRT} specification like \c{EXTERN} does
4975 (explained in \k{objextern}). So you can also declare things like
4977 \c common foo 10:wrt dgroup
4978 \c common bar 16:far 2:wrt data
4979 \c common baz 24:wrt data:6
4982 \H{win32fmt} \i\c{win32}: Microsoft Win32 Object Files
4984 The \c{win32} output format generates Microsoft Win32 object files,
4985 suitable for passing to Microsoft linkers such as \i{Visual C++}.
4986 Note that Borland Win32 compilers do not use this format, but use
4987 \c{obj} instead (see \k{objfmt}).
4989 \c{win32} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.obj}.
4991 Note that although Microsoft say that Win32 object files follow the
4992 \c{COFF} (Common Object File Format) standard, the object files produced
4993 by Microsoft Win32 compilers are not compatible with COFF linkers
4994 such as DJGPP's, and vice versa. This is due to a difference of
4995 opinion over the precise semantics of PC-relative relocations. To
4996 produce COFF files suitable for DJGPP, use NASM's \c{coff} output
4997 format; conversely, the \c{coff} format does not produce object
4998 files that Win32 linkers can generate correct output from.
5001 \S{win32sect} \c{win32} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5002 Directive\I{SECTION, win32 extensions to}
5004 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{win32} allows you to specify additional
5005 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5006 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5007 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section names}
5008 \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}, but may still be overridden by
5011 The available qualifiers are:
5013 \b \c{code}, or equivalently \c{text}, defines the section to be a
5014 code section. This marks the section as readable and executable, but
5015 not writable, and also indicates to the linker that the type of the
5018 \b \c{data} and \c{bss} define the section to be a data section,
5019 analogously to \c{code}. Data sections are marked as readable and
5020 writable, but not executable. \c{data} declares an initialized data
5021 section, whereas \c{bss} declares an uninitialized data section.
5023 \b \c{rdata} declares an initialized data section that is readable
5024 but not writable. Microsoft compilers use this section to place
5027 \b \c{info} defines the section to be an \i{informational section},
5028 which is not included in the executable file by the linker, but may
5029 (for example) pass information \e{to} the linker. For example,
5030 declaring an \c{info}-type section called \i\c{.drectve} causes the
5031 linker to interpret the contents of the section as command-line
5034 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5035 \I{section alignment, in win32}\I{alignment, in win32
5036 sections}alignment requirements of the section. The maximum you may
5037 specify is 64: the Win32 object file format contains no means to
5038 request a greater section alignment than this. If alignment is not
5039 explicitly specified, the defaults are 16-byte alignment for code
5040 sections, 8-byte alignment for rdata sections and 4-byte alignment
5041 for data (and BSS) sections.
5042 Informational sections get a default alignment of 1 byte (no
5043 alignment), though the value does not matter.
5045 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5048 \c section .text code align=16
5049 \c section .data data align=4
5050 \c section .rdata rdata align=8
5051 \c section .bss bss align=4
5053 Any other section name is treated by default like \c{.text}.
5055 \S{win32safeseh} \c{win32}: Safe Structured Exception Handling
5057 Among other improvements in Windows XP SP2 and Windows Server 2003
5058 Microsoft has introduced concept of "safe structured exception
5059 handling." General idea is to collect handlers' entry points in
5060 designated read-only table and have alleged entry point verified
5061 against this table prior exception control is passed to the handler. In
5062 order for an executable module to be equipped with such "safe exception
5063 handler table," all object modules on linker command line has to comply
5064 with certain criteria. If one single module among them does not, then
5065 the table in question is omitted and above mentioned run-time checks
5066 will not be performed for application in question. Table omission is by
5067 default silent and therefore can be easily overlooked. One can instruct
5068 linker to refuse to produce binary without such table by passing
5069 \c{/safeseh} command line option.
5071 Without regard to this run-time check merits it's natural to expect
5072 NASM to be capable of generating modules suitable for \c{/safeseh}
5073 linking. From developer's viewpoint the problem is two-fold:
5075 \b how to adapt modules not deploying exception handlers of their own;
5077 \b how to adapt/develop modules utilizing custom exception handling;
5079 Former can be easily achieved with any NASM version by adding following
5080 line to source code:
5084 As of version 2.03 NASM adds this absolute symbol automatically. If
5085 it's not already present to be precise. I.e. if for whatever reason
5086 developer would choose to assign another value in source file, it would
5087 still be perfectly possible.
5089 Registering custom exception handler on the other hand requires certain
5090 "magic." As of version 2.03 additional directive is implemented,
5091 \c{safeseh}, which instructs the assembler to produce appropriately
5092 formatted input data for above mentioned "safe exception handler
5093 table." Its typical use would be:
5096 \c extern _MessageBoxA@16
5097 \c %if __NASM_VERSION_ID__ >= 0x02030000
5098 \c safeseh handler ; register handler as "safe handler"
5101 \c push DWORD 1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5102 \c push DWORD caption
5105 \c call _MessageBoxA@16
5106 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5107 \c ; for exception handler
5111 \c push DWORD handler
5112 \c push DWORD [fs:0]
5113 \c mov DWORD [fs:0],esp ; engage exception handler
5115 \c mov eax,DWORD[eax] ; cause exception
5116 \c pop DWORD [fs:0] ; disengage exception handler
5119 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5120 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5122 \c section .drectve info
5123 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5125 As you might imagine, it's perfectly possible to produce .exe binary
5126 with "safe exception handler table" and yet engage unregistered
5127 exception handler. Indeed, handler is engaged by simply manipulating
5128 \c{[fs:0]} location at run-time, something linker has no power over,
5129 run-time that is. It should be explicitly mentioned that such failure
5130 to register handler's entry point with \c{safeseh} directive has
5131 undesired side effect at run-time. If exception is raised and
5132 unregistered handler is to be executed, the application is abruptly
5133 terminated without any notification whatsoever. One can argue that
5134 system could at least have logged some kind "non-safe exception
5135 handler in x.exe at address n" message in event log, but no, literally
5136 no notification is provided and user is left with no clue on what
5137 caused application failure.
5139 Finally, all mentions of linker in this paragraph refer to Microsoft
5140 linker version 7.x and later. Presence of \c{@feat.00} symbol and input
5141 data for "safe exception handler table" causes no backward
5142 incompatibilities and "safeseh" modules generated by NASM 2.03 and
5143 later can still be linked by earlier versions or non-Microsoft linkers.
5146 \H{win64fmt} \i\c{win64}: Microsoft Win64 Object Files
5148 The \c{win64} output format generates Microsoft Win64 object files,
5149 which is nearly 100% identical to the \c{win32} object format (\k{win32fmt})
5150 with the exception that it is meant to target 64-bit code and the x86-64
5151 platform altogether. This object file is used exactly the same as the \c{win32}
5152 object format (\k{win32fmt}), in NASM, with regard to this exception.
5154 \S{win64pic} \c{win64}: Writing Position-Independent Code
5156 While \c{REL} takes good care of RIP-relative addressing, there is one
5157 aspect that is easy to overlook for a Win64 programmer: indirect
5158 references. Consider a switch dispatch table:
5160 \c jmp QWORD[dsptch+rax*8]
5166 Even novice Win64 assembler programmer will soon realize that the code
5167 is not 64-bit savvy. Most notably linker will refuse to link it with
5168 "\c{'ADDR32' relocation to '.text' invalid without
5169 /LARGEADDRESSAWARE:NO}". So [s]he will have to split jmp instruction as
5172 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5173 \c jmp QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5175 What happens behind the scene is that effective address in \c{lea} is
5176 encoded relative to instruction pointer, or in perfectly
5177 position-independent manner. But this is only part of the problem!
5178 Trouble is that in .dll context \c{caseN} relocations will make their
5179 way to the final module and might have to be adjusted at .dll load
5180 time. To be specific when it can't be loaded at preferred address. And
5181 when this occurs, pages with such relocations will be rendered private
5182 to current process, which kind of undermines the idea of sharing .dll.
5183 But no worry, it's trivial to fix:
5185 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5186 \c add rbx,QWORD[rbx+rax*8]
5189 \c dsptch: dq case0-dsptch
5193 NASM version 2.03 and later provides another alternative, \c{wrt
5194 ..imagebase} operator, which returns offset from base address of the
5195 current image, be it .exe or .dll module, therefore the name. For those
5196 acquainted with PE-COFF format base address denotes start of
5197 \c{IMAGE_DOS_HEADER} structure. Here is how to implement switch with
5198 these image-relative references:
5200 \c lea rbx,[rel dsptch]
5201 \c mov eax,DWORD[rbx+rax*4]
5202 \c sub rbx,dsptch wrt ..imagebase
5206 \c dsptch: dd case0 wrt ..imagebase
5207 \c dd case1 wrt ..imagebase
5209 One can argue that the operator is redundant. Indeed, snippet before
5210 last works just fine with any NASM version and is not even Windows
5211 specific... The real reason for implementing \c{wrt ..imagebase} will
5212 become apparent in next paragraph.
5214 It should be noted that \c{wrt ..imagebase} is defined as 32-bit
5217 \c dd label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5218 \c dq label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5219 \c mov eax,label wrt ..imagebase ; ok
5220 \c mov rax,label wrt ..imagebase ; bad
5222 \S{win64seh} \c{win64}: Structured Exception Handling
5224 Structured exception handing in Win64 is completely different matter
5225 from Win32. Upon exception program counter value is noted, and
5226 linker-generated table comprising start and end addresses of all the
5227 functions [in given executable module] is traversed and compared to the
5228 saved program counter. Thus so called \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5229 identified. If it's not found, then offending subroutine is assumed to
5230 be "leaf" and just mentioned lookup procedure is attempted for its
5231 caller. In Win64 leaf function is such function that does not call any
5232 other function \e{nor} modifies any Win64 non-volatile registers,
5233 including stack pointer. The latter ensures that it's possible to
5234 identify leaf function's caller by simply pulling the value from the
5237 While majority of subroutines written in assembler are not calling any
5238 other function, requirement for non-volatile registers' immutability
5239 leaves developer with not more than 7 registers and no stack frame,
5240 which is not necessarily what [s]he counted with. Customarily one would
5241 meet the requirement by saving non-volatile registers on stack and
5242 restoring them upon return, so what can go wrong? If [and only if] an
5243 exception is raised at run-time and no \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5244 associated with such "leaf" function, the stack unwind procedure will
5245 expect to find caller's return address on the top of stack immediately
5246 followed by its frame. Given that developer pushed caller's
5247 non-volatile registers on stack, would the value on top point at some
5248 code segment or even addressable space? Well, developer can attempt
5249 copying caller's return address to the top of stack and this would
5250 actually work in some very specific circumstances. But unless developer
5251 can guarantee that these circumstances are always met, it's more
5252 appropriate to assume worst case scenario, i.e. stack unwind procedure
5253 going berserk. Relevant question is what happens then? Application is
5254 abruptly terminated without any notification whatsoever. Just like in
5255 Win32 case, one can argue that system could at least have logged
5256 "unwind procedure went berserk in x.exe at address n" in event log, but
5257 no, no trace of failure is left.
5259 Now, when we understand significance of the \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure,
5260 let's discuss what's in it and/or how it's processed. First of all it
5261 is checked for presence of reference to custom language-specific
5262 exception handler. If there is one, then it's invoked. Depending on the
5263 return value, execution flow is resumed (exception is said to be
5264 "handled"), \e{or} rest of \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is processed as
5265 following. Beside optional reference to custom handler, it carries
5266 information about current callee's stack frame and where non-volatile
5267 registers are saved. Information is detailed enough to be able to
5268 reconstruct contents of caller's non-volatile registers upon call to
5269 current callee. And so caller's context is reconstructed, and then
5270 unwind procedure is repeated, i.e. another \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure is
5271 associated, this time, with caller's instruction pointer, which is then
5272 checked for presence of reference to language-specific handler, etc.
5273 The procedure is recursively repeated till exception is handled. As
5274 last resort system "handles" it by generating memory core dump and
5275 terminating the application.
5277 As for the moment of this writing NASM unfortunately does not
5278 facilitate generation of above mentioned detailed information about
5279 stack frame layout. But as of version 2.03 it implements building
5280 blocks for generating structures involved in stack unwinding. As
5281 simplest example, here is how to deploy custom exception handler for
5286 \c extern MessageBoxA
5292 \c mov r9,1 ; MB_OKCANCEL
5294 \c sub eax,1 ; incidentally suits as return value
5295 \c ; for exception handler
5301 \c mov rax,QWORD[rax] ; cause exception
5304 \c text: db 'OK to rethrow, CANCEL to generate core dump',0
5305 \c caption:db 'SEGV',0
5307 \c section .pdata rdata align=4
5308 \c dd main wrt ..imagebase
5309 \c dd main_end wrt ..imagebase
5310 \c dd xmain wrt ..imagebase
5311 \c section .xdata rdata align=8
5312 \c xmain: db 9,0,0,0
5313 \c dd handler wrt ..imagebase
5314 \c section .drectve info
5315 \c db '/defaultlib:user32.lib /defaultlib:msvcrt.lib '
5317 What you see in \c{.pdata} section is element of the "table comprising
5318 start and end addresses of function" along with reference to associated
5319 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure. And what you see in \c{.xdata} section is
5320 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure describing function with no frame, but with
5321 designated exception handler. References are \e{required} to be
5322 image-relative (which is the real reason for implementing \c{wrt
5323 ..imagebase} operator). It should be noted that \c{rdata align=n}, as
5324 well as \c{wrt ..imagebase}, are optional in these two segments'
5325 contexts, i.e. can be omitted. Latter means that \e{all} 32-bit
5326 references, not only above listed required ones, placed into these two
5327 segments turn out image-relative. Why is it important to understand?
5328 Developer is allowed to append handler-specific data to \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5329 structure, and if [s]he adds a 32-bit reference, then [s]he will have
5330 to remember to adjust its value to obtain the real pointer.
5332 As already mentioned, in Win64 terms leaf function is one that does not
5333 call any other function \e{nor} modifies any non-volatile register,
5334 including stack pointer. But it's not uncommon that assembler
5335 programmer plans to utilize every single register and sometimes even
5336 have variable stack frame. Is there anything one can do with bare
5337 building blocks? I.e. besides manually composing fully-fledged
5338 \c{UNWIND_INFO} structure, which would surely be considered
5339 error-prone? Yes, there is. Recall that exception handler is called
5340 first, before stack layout is analyzed. As it turned out, it's
5341 perfectly possible to manipulate current callee's context in custom
5342 handler in manner that permits further stack unwinding. General idea is
5343 that handler would not actually "handle" the exception, but instead
5344 restore callee's context, as it was at its entry point and thus mimic
5345 leaf function. In other words, handler would simply undertake part of
5346 unwinding procedure. Consider following example:
5349 \c mov rax,rsp ; copy rsp to volatile register
5350 \c push r15 ; save non-volatile registers
5353 \c mov r11,rsp ; prepare variable stack frame
5356 \c mov QWORD[r11],rax ; check for exceptions
5357 \c mov rsp,r11 ; allocate stack frame
5358 \c mov QWORD[rsp],rax ; save original rsp value
5361 \c mov r11,QWORD[rsp] ; pull original rsp value
5362 \c mov rbp,QWORD[r11-24]
5363 \c mov rbx,QWORD[r11-16]
5364 \c mov r15,QWORD[r11-8]
5365 \c mov rsp,r11 ; destroy frame
5368 The keyword is that up to \c{magic_point} original \c{rsp} value
5369 remains in chosen volatile register and no non-volatile register,
5370 except for \c{rsp}, is modified. While past \c{magic_point} \c{rsp}
5371 remains constant till the very end of the \c{function}. In this case
5372 custom language-specific exception handler would look like this:
5374 \c EXCEPTION_DISPOSITION handler (EXCEPTION_RECORD *rec,ULONG64 frame,
5375 \c CONTEXT *context,DISPATCHER_CONTEXT *disp)
5377 \c if (context->Rip<(ULONG64)magic_point)
5378 \c rsp = (ULONG64 *)context->Rax;
5380 \c { rsp = ((ULONG64 **)context->Rsp)[0];
5381 \c context->Rbp = rsp[-3];
5382 \c context->Rbx = rsp[-2];
5383 \c context->R15 = rsp[-1];
5385 \c context->Rsp = (ULONG64)rsp;
5387 \c memcpy (disp->ContextRecord,context,sizeof(CONTEXT));
5388 \c RtlVirtualUnwind(UNW_FLAG_NHANDLER,disp->ImageBase,
5389 \c dips->ControlPc,disp->FunctionEntry,disp->ContextRecord,
5390 \c &disp->HandlerData,&disp->EstablisherFrame,NULL);
5391 \c return ExceptionContinueSearch;
5394 As custom handler mimics leaf function, corresponding \c{UNWIND_INFO}
5395 structure does not have to contain any information about stack frame
5398 \H{cofffmt} \i\c{coff}: \i{Common Object File Format}
5400 The \c{coff} output type produces \c{COFF} object files suitable for
5401 linking with the \i{DJGPP} linker.
5403 \c{coff} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5405 The \c{coff} format supports the same extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5406 directive as \c{win32} does, except that the \c{align} qualifier and
5407 the \c{info} section type are not supported.
5409 \H{machofmt} \I{Mach-O}\i\c{macho32} and \i\c{macho64}: \i{Mach Object File Format}
5411 The \c{macho32} and \c{macho64} output formts produces \c{Mach-O}
5412 object files suitable for linking with the \i{MacOS X} linker.
5413 \i\c{macho} is a synonym for \c{macho32}.
5415 \c{macho} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5417 \H{elffmt} \i\c{elf32} and \i\c{elf64}: \I{ELF}\I{linux, elf}\i{Executable and Linkable
5418 Format} Object Files
5420 The \c{elf32} and \c{elf64} output formats generate \c{ELF32 and ELF64} (Executable and Linkable Format) object files, as used by Linux as well as \i{Unix System V},
5421 including \i{Solaris x86}, \i{UnixWare} and \i{SCO Unix}. \c{elf}
5422 provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5423 \c{elf} is a synonym for \c{elf32}.
5425 \S{abisect} ELF specific directive \i\c{osabi}
5427 The ELF header specifies the application binary interface for the target operating system (OSABI).
5428 This field can be set by using the \c{osabi} directive with the numeric value (0-255) of the target
5429 system. If this directive is not used, the default value will be "UNIX System V ABI" (0) which will work on
5430 most systems which support ELF.
5432 \S{elfsect} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{SECTION}
5433 Directive\I{SECTION, elf extensions to}
5435 Like the \c{obj} format, \c{elf} allows you to specify additional
5436 information on the \c{SECTION} directive line, to control the type
5437 and properties of sections you declare. Section types and properties
5438 are generated automatically by NASM for the \i{standard section
5439 names}, but may still be
5440 overridden by these qualifiers.
5442 The available qualifiers are:
5444 \b \i\c{alloc} defines the section to be one which is loaded into
5445 memory when the program is run. \i\c{noalloc} defines it to be one
5446 which is not, such as an informational or comment section.
5448 \b \i\c{exec} defines the section to be one which should have execute
5449 permission when the program is run. \i\c{noexec} defines it as one
5452 \b \i\c{write} defines the section to be one which should be writable
5453 when the program is run. \i\c{nowrite} defines it as one which should
5456 \b \i\c{progbits} defines the section to be one with explicit contents
5457 stored in the object file: an ordinary code or data section, for
5458 example, \i\c{nobits} defines the section to be one with no explicit
5459 contents given, such as a BSS section.
5461 \b \c{align=}, used with a trailing number as in \c{obj}, gives the
5462 \I{section alignment, in elf}\I{alignment, in elf sections}alignment
5463 requirements of the section.
5465 \b \i\c{tls} defines the section to be one which contains
5466 thread local variables.
5468 The defaults assumed by NASM if you do not specify the above
5471 \I\c{.text} \I\c{.rodata} \I\c{.lrodata} \I\c{.data} \I\c{.ldata}
5472 \I\c{.bss} \I\c{.lbss} \I\c{.tdata} \I\c{.tbss} \I\c\{.comment}
5474 \c section .text progbits alloc exec nowrite align=16
5475 \c section .rodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5476 \c section .lrodata progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=4
5477 \c section .data progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5478 \c section .ldata progbits alloc noexec write align=4
5479 \c section .bss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5480 \c section .lbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4
5481 \c section .tdata progbits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5482 \c section .tbss nobits alloc noexec write align=4 tls
5483 \c section .comment progbits noalloc noexec nowrite align=1
5484 \c section other progbits alloc noexec nowrite align=1
5486 (Any section name other than those in the above table
5487 is treated by default like \c{other} in the above table.
5488 Please note that section names are case sensitive.)
5491 \S{elfwrt} \i{Position-Independent Code}\I{PIC}: \c{elf} Special
5492 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5494 The \c{ELF} specification contains enough features to allow
5495 position-independent code (PIC) to be written, which makes \i{ELF
5496 shared libraries} very flexible. However, it also means NASM has to
5497 be able to generate a variety of ELF specific relocation types in ELF
5498 object files, if it is to be an assembler which can write PIC.
5500 Since \c{ELF} does not support segment-base references, the \c{WRT}
5501 operator is not used for its normal purpose; therefore NASM's
5502 \c{elf} output format makes use of \c{WRT} for a different purpose,
5503 namely the PIC-specific \I{relocations, PIC-specific}relocation
5506 \c{elf} defines five special symbols which you can use as the
5507 right-hand side of the \c{WRT} operator to obtain PIC relocation
5508 types. They are \i\c{..gotpc}, \i\c{..gotoff}, \i\c{..got},
5509 \i\c{..plt} and \i\c{..sym}. Their functions are summarized here:
5511 \b Referring to the symbol marking the global offset table base
5512 using \c{wrt ..gotpc} will end up giving the distance from the
5513 beginning of the current section to the global offset table.
5514 (\i\c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_} is the standard symbol name used to
5515 refer to the \i{GOT}.) So you would then need to add \i\c{$$} to the
5516 result to get the real address of the GOT.
5518 \b Referring to a location in one of your own sections using \c{wrt
5519 ..gotoff} will give the distance from the beginning of the GOT to
5520 the specified location, so that adding on the address of the GOT
5521 would give the real address of the location you wanted.
5523 \b Referring to an external or global symbol using \c{wrt ..got}
5524 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5525 address of the symbol, and the reference gives the distance from the
5526 beginning of the GOT to the entry; so you can add on the address of
5527 the GOT, load from the resulting address, and end up with the
5528 address of the symbol.
5530 \b Referring to a procedure name using \c{wrt ..plt} causes the
5531 linker to build a \i{procedure linkage table} entry for the symbol,
5532 and the reference gives the address of the \i{PLT} entry. You can
5533 only use this in contexts which would generate a PC-relative
5534 relocation normally (i.e. as the destination for \c{CALL} or
5535 \c{JMP}), since ELF contains no relocation type to refer to PLT
5538 \b Referring to a symbol name using \c{wrt ..sym} causes NASM to
5539 write an ordinary relocation, but instead of making the relocation
5540 relative to the start of the section and then adding on the offset
5541 to the symbol, it will write a relocation record aimed directly at
5542 the symbol in question. The distinction is a necessary one due to a
5543 peculiarity of the dynamic linker.
5545 A fuller explanation of how to use these relocation types to write
5546 shared libraries entirely in NASM is given in \k{picdll}.
5548 \S{elftls} \i{Thread Local Storage}\I{TLS}: \c{elf} Special
5549 Symbols and \i\c{WRT}
5551 \b In ELF32 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5552 \c{wrt ..tlsie} \I\c{..tlsie}
5553 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5554 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5555 of the symbol with code such as:
5557 \c mov eax,[tid wrt ..tlsie]
5561 \b In ELF64 mode, referring to an external or global symbol using
5562 \c{wrt ..gottpoff} \I\c{..gottpoff}
5563 causes the linker to build an entry \e{in} the GOT containing the
5564 offset of the symbol within the TLS block, so you can access the value
5565 of the symbol with code such as:
5567 \c mov rax,[rel tid wrt ..gottpoff]
5571 \S{elfglob} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5572 elf extensions to}\I{GLOBAL, aoutb extensions to}
5574 \c{ELF} object files can contain more information about a global symbol
5575 than just its address: they can contain the \I{symbol sizes,
5576 specifying}\I{size, of symbols}size of the symbol and its \I{symbol
5577 types, specifying}\I{type, of symbols}type as well. These are not
5578 merely debugger conveniences, but are actually necessary when the
5579 program being written is a \i{shared library}. NASM therefore
5580 supports some extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} directive, allowing you
5581 to specify these features.
5583 You can specify whether a global variable is a function or a data
5584 object by suffixing the name with a colon and the word
5585 \i\c{function} or \i\c{data}. (\i\c{object} is a synonym for
5586 \c{data}.) For example:
5588 \c global hashlookup:function, hashtable:data
5590 exports the global symbol \c{hashlookup} as a function and
5591 \c{hashtable} as a data object.
5593 Optionally, you can control the ELF visibility of the symbol. Just
5594 add one of the visibility keywords: \i\c{default}, \i\c{internal},
5595 \i\c{hidden}, or \i\c{protected}. The default is \i\c{default} of
5596 course. For example, to make \c{hashlookup} hidden:
5598 \c global hashlookup:function hidden
5600 You can also specify the size of the data associated with the
5601 symbol, as a numeric expression (which may involve labels, and even
5602 forward references) after the type specifier. Like this:
5604 \c global hashtable:data (hashtable.end - hashtable)
5607 \c db this,that,theother ; some data here
5610 This makes NASM automatically calculate the length of the table and
5611 place that information into the \c{ELF} symbol table.
5613 Declaring the type and size of global symbols is necessary when
5614 writing shared library code. For more information, see
5618 \S{elfcomm} \c{elf} Extensions to the \c{COMMON} Directive
5619 \I{COMMON, elf extensions to}
5621 \c{ELF} also allows you to specify alignment requirements \I{common
5622 variables, alignment in elf}\I{alignment, of elf common variables}on
5623 common variables. This is done by putting a number (which must be a
5624 power of two) after the name and size of the common variable,
5625 separated (as usual) by a colon. For example, an array of
5626 doublewords would benefit from 4-byte alignment:
5628 \c common dwordarray 128:4
5630 This declares the total size of the array to be 128 bytes, and
5631 requires that it be aligned on a 4-byte boundary.
5634 \S{elf16} 16-bit code and ELF
5635 \I{ELF, 16-bit code and}
5637 The \c{ELF32} specification doesn't provide relocations for 8- and
5638 16-bit values, but the GNU \c{ld} linker adds these as an extension.
5639 NASM can generate GNU-compatible relocations, to allow 16-bit code to
5640 be linked as ELF using GNU \c{ld}. If NASM is used with the
5641 \c{-w+gnu-elf-extensions} option, a warning is issued when one of
5642 these relocations is generated.
5644 \S{elfdbg} Debug formats and ELF
5645 \I{ELF, Debug formats and}
5647 \c{ELF32} and \c{ELF64} provide debug information in \c{STABS} and \c{DWARF} formats.
5648 Line number information is generated for all executable sections, but please
5649 note that only the ".text" section is executable by default.
5651 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aout}: Linux \I{a.out, Linux version}\I{linux, a.out}\c{a.out} Object Files
5653 The \c{aout} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form used
5654 by early Linux systems (current Linux systems use ELF, see
5655 \k{elffmt}.) These differ from other \c{a.out} object files in that
5656 the magic number in the first four bytes of the file is
5657 different; also, some implementations of \c{a.out}, for example
5658 NetBSD's, support position-independent code, which Linux's
5659 implementation does not.
5661 \c{a.out} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5663 \c{a.out} is a very simple object format. It supports no special
5664 directives, no special symbols, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT}, and no
5665 extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5666 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5669 \H{aoutfmt} \i\c{aoutb}: \i{NetBSD}/\i{FreeBSD}/\i{OpenBSD}
5670 \I{a.out, BSD version}\c{a.out} Object Files
5672 The \c{aoutb} format generates \c{a.out} object files, in the form
5673 used by the various free \c{BSD Unix} clones, \c{NetBSD}, \c{FreeBSD}
5674 and \c{OpenBSD}. For simple object files, this object format is exactly
5675 the same as \c{aout} except for the magic number in the first four bytes
5676 of the file. However, the \c{aoutb} format supports
5677 \I{PIC}\i{position-independent code} in the same way as the \c{elf}
5678 format, so you can use it to write \c{BSD} \i{shared libraries}.
5680 \c{aoutb} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5682 \c{aoutb} supports no special directives, no special symbols, and
5683 only the three \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data}
5684 and \i\c{.bss}. However, it also supports the same use of \i\c{WRT} as
5685 \c{elf} does, to provide position-independent code relocation types.
5686 See \k{elfwrt} for full documentation of this feature.
5688 \c{aoutb} also supports the same extensions to the \c{GLOBAL}
5689 directive as \c{elf} does: see \k{elfglob} for documentation of
5693 \H{as86fmt} \c{as86}: \i{Minix}/Linux\I{linux, as86} \i\c{as86} Object Files
5695 The Minix/Linux 16-bit assembler \c{as86} has its own non-standard
5696 object file format. Although its companion linker \i\c{ld86} produces
5697 something close to ordinary \c{a.out} binaries as output, the object
5698 file format used to communicate between \c{as86} and \c{ld86} is not
5701 NASM supports this format, just in case it is useful, as \c{as86}.
5702 \c{as86} provides a default output file-name extension of \c{.o}.
5704 \c{as86} is a very simple object format (from the NASM user's point
5705 of view). It supports no special directives, no use of \c{SEG} or \c{WRT},
5706 and no extensions to any standard directives. It supports only the three
5707 \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text}, \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}. The
5708 only special symbol supported is \c{..start}.
5711 \H{rdffmt} \I{RDOFF}\i\c{rdf}: \i{Relocatable Dynamic Object File
5714 The \c{rdf} output format produces \c{RDOFF} object files. \c{RDOFF}
5715 (Relocatable Dynamic Object File Format) is a home-grown object-file
5716 format, designed alongside NASM itself and reflecting in its file
5717 format the internal structure of the assembler.
5719 \c{RDOFF} is not used by any well-known operating systems. Those
5720 writing their own systems, however, may well wish to use \c{RDOFF}
5721 as their object format, on the grounds that it is designed primarily
5722 for simplicity and contains very little file-header bureaucracy.
5724 The Unix NASM archive, and the DOS archive which includes sources,
5725 both contain an \I{rdoff subdirectory}\c{rdoff} subdirectory holding
5726 a set of RDOFF utilities: an RDF linker, an \c{RDF} static-library
5727 manager, an RDF file dump utility, and a program which will load and
5728 execute an RDF executable under Linux.
5730 \c{rdf} supports only the \i{standard section names} \i\c{.text},
5731 \i\c{.data} and \i\c{.bss}.
5734 \S{rdflib} Requiring a Library: The \i\c{LIBRARY} Directive
5736 \c{RDOFF} contains a mechanism for an object file to demand a given
5737 library to be linked to the module, either at load time or run time.
5738 This is done by the \c{LIBRARY} directive, which takes one argument
5739 which is the name of the module:
5741 \c library mylib.rdl
5744 \S{rdfmod} Specifying a Module Name: The \i\c{MODULE} Directive
5746 Special \c{RDOFF} header record is used to store the name of the module.
5747 It can be used, for example, by run-time loader to perform dynamic
5748 linking. \c{MODULE} directive takes one argument which is the name
5753 Note that when you statically link modules and tell linker to strip
5754 the symbols from output file, all module names will be stripped too.
5755 To avoid it, you should start module names with \I{$, prefix}\c{$}, like:
5757 \c module $kernel.core
5760 \S{rdfglob} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{GLOBAL} Directive\I{GLOBAL,
5763 \c{RDOFF} global symbols can contain additional information needed by
5764 the static linker. You can mark a global symbol as exported, thus
5765 telling the linker do not strip it from target executable or library
5766 file. Like in \c{ELF}, you can also specify whether an exported symbol
5767 is a procedure (function) or data object.
5769 Suffixing the name with a colon and the word \i\c{export} you make the
5772 \c global sys_open:export
5774 To specify that exported symbol is a procedure (function), you add the
5775 word \i\c{proc} or \i\c{function} after declaration:
5777 \c global sys_open:export proc
5779 Similarly, to specify exported data object, add the word \i\c{data}
5780 or \i\c{object} to the directive:
5782 \c global kernel_ticks:export data
5785 \S{rdfimpt} \c{rdf} Extensions to the \c{EXTERN} Directive\I{EXTERN,
5788 By default the \c{EXTERN} directive in \c{RDOFF} declares a "pure external"
5789 symbol (i.e. the static linker will complain if such a symbol is not resolved).
5790 To declare an "imported" symbol, which must be resolved later during a dynamic
5791 linking phase, \c{RDOFF} offers an additional \c{import} modifier. As in
5792 \c{GLOBAL}, you can also specify whether an imported symbol is a procedure
5793 (function) or data object. For example:
5796 \c extern _open:import
5797 \c extern _printf:import proc
5798 \c extern _errno:import data
5800 Here the directive \c{LIBRARY} is also included, which gives the dynamic linker
5801 a hint as to where to find requested symbols.
5804 \H{dbgfmt} \i\c{dbg}: Debugging Format
5806 The \c{dbg} output format is not built into NASM in the default
5807 configuration. If you are building your own NASM executable from the
5808 sources, you can define \i\c{OF_DBG} in \c{output/outform.h} or on the
5809 compiler command line, and obtain the \c{dbg} output format.
5811 The \c{dbg} format does not output an object file as such; instead,
5812 it outputs a text file which contains a complete list of all the
5813 transactions between the main body of NASM and the output-format
5814 back end module. It is primarily intended to aid people who want to
5815 write their own output drivers, so that they can get a clearer idea
5816 of the various requests the main program makes of the output driver,
5817 and in what order they happen.
5819 For simple files, one can easily use the \c{dbg} format like this:
5821 \c nasm -f dbg filename.asm
5823 which will generate a diagnostic file called \c{filename.dbg}.
5824 However, this will not work well on files which were designed for a
5825 different object format, because each object format defines its own
5826 macros (usually user-level forms of directives), and those macros
5827 will not be defined in the \c{dbg} format. Therefore it can be
5828 useful to run NASM twice, in order to do the preprocessing with the
5829 native object format selected:
5831 \c nasm -e -f rdf -o rdfprog.i rdfprog.asm
5832 \c nasm -a -f dbg rdfprog.i
5834 This preprocesses \c{rdfprog.asm} into \c{rdfprog.i}, keeping the
5835 \c{rdf} object format selected in order to make sure RDF special
5836 directives are converted into primitive form correctly. Then the
5837 preprocessed source is fed through the \c{dbg} format to generate
5838 the final diagnostic output.
5840 This workaround will still typically not work for programs intended
5841 for \c{obj} format, because the \c{obj} \c{SEGMENT} and \c{GROUP}
5842 directives have side effects of defining the segment and group names
5843 as symbols; \c{dbg} will not do this, so the program will not
5844 assemble. You will have to work around that by defining the symbols
5845 yourself (using \c{EXTERN}, for example) if you really need to get a
5846 \c{dbg} trace of an \c{obj}-specific source file.
5848 \c{dbg} accepts any section name and any directives at all, and logs
5849 them all to its output file.
5852 \C{16bit} Writing 16-bit Code (DOS, Windows 3/3.1)
5854 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues encountered
5855 when writing 16-bit code to run under \c{MS-DOS} or \c{Windows 3.x}. It
5856 covers how to link programs to produce \c{.EXE} or \c{.COM} files,
5857 how to write \c{.SYS} device drivers, and how to interface assembly
5858 language code with 16-bit C compilers and with Borland Pascal.
5861 \H{exefiles} Producing \i\c{.EXE} Files
5863 Any large program written under DOS needs to be built as a \c{.EXE}
5864 file: only \c{.EXE} files have the necessary internal structure
5865 required to span more than one 64K segment. \i{Windows} programs,
5866 also, have to be built as \c{.EXE} files, since Windows does not
5867 support the \c{.COM} format.
5869 In general, you generate \c{.EXE} files by using the \c{obj} output
5870 format to produce one or more \i\c{.OBJ} files, and then linking
5871 them together using a linker. However, NASM also supports the direct
5872 generation of simple DOS \c{.EXE} files using the \c{bin} output
5873 format (by using \c{DB} and \c{DW} to construct the \c{.EXE} file
5874 header), and a macro package is supplied to do this. Thanks to
5875 Yann Guidon for contributing the code for this.
5877 NASM may also support \c{.EXE} natively as another output format in
5881 \S{objexe} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5883 This section describes the usual method of generating \c{.EXE} files
5884 by linking \c{.OBJ} files together.
5886 Most 16-bit programming language packages come with a suitable
5887 linker; if you have none of these, there is a free linker called
5888 \i{VAL}\I{linker, free}, available in \c{LZH} archive format from
5889 \W{ftp://x2ftp.oulu.fi/pub/msdos/programming/lang/}\i\c{x2ftp.oulu.fi}.
5890 An LZH archiver can be found at
5891 \W{ftp://ftp.simtel.net/pub/simtelnet/msdos/arcers}\i\c{ftp.simtel.net}.
5892 There is another `free' linker (though this one doesn't come with
5893 sources) called \i{FREELINK}, available from
5894 \W{http://www.pcorner.com/tpc/old/3-101.html}\i\c{www.pcorner.com}.
5895 A third, \i\c{djlink}, written by DJ Delorie, is available at
5896 \W{http://www.delorie.com/djgpp/16bit/djlink/}\i\c{www.delorie.com}.
5897 A fourth linker, \i\c{ALINK}, written by Anthony A.J. Williams, is
5898 available at \W{http://alink.sourceforge.net}\i\c{alink.sourceforge.net}.
5900 When linking several \c{.OBJ} files into a \c{.EXE} file, you should
5901 ensure that exactly one of them has a start point defined (using the
5902 \I{program entry point}\i\c{..start} special symbol defined by the
5903 \c{obj} format: see \k{dotdotstart}). If no module defines a start
5904 point, the linker will not know what value to give the entry-point
5905 field in the output file header; if more than one defines a start
5906 point, the linker will not know \e{which} value to use.
5908 An example of a NASM source file which can be assembled to a
5909 \c{.OBJ} file and linked on its own to a \c{.EXE} is given here. It
5910 demonstrates the basic principles of defining a stack, initialising
5911 the segment registers, and declaring a start point. This file is
5912 also provided in the \I{test subdirectory}\c{test} subdirectory of
5913 the NASM archives, under the name \c{objexe.asm}.
5924 This initial piece of code sets up \c{DS} to point to the data
5925 segment, and initializes \c{SS} and \c{SP} to point to the top of
5926 the provided stack. Notice that interrupts are implicitly disabled
5927 for one instruction after a move into \c{SS}, precisely for this
5928 situation, so that there's no chance of an interrupt occurring
5929 between the loads of \c{SS} and \c{SP} and not having a stack to
5932 Note also that the special symbol \c{..start} is defined at the
5933 beginning of this code, which means that will be the entry point
5934 into the resulting executable file.
5940 The above is the main program: load \c{DS:DX} with a pointer to the
5941 greeting message (\c{hello} is implicitly relative to the segment
5942 \c{data}, which was loaded into \c{DS} in the setup code, so the
5943 full pointer is valid), and call the DOS print-string function.
5948 This terminates the program using another DOS system call.
5952 \c hello: db 'hello, world', 13, 10, '$'
5954 The data segment contains the string we want to display.
5956 \c segment stack stack
5960 The above code declares a stack segment containing 64 bytes of
5961 uninitialized stack space, and points \c{stacktop} at the top of it.
5962 The directive \c{segment stack stack} defines a segment \e{called}
5963 \c{stack}, and also of \e{type} \c{STACK}. The latter is not
5964 necessary to the correct running of the program, but linkers are
5965 likely to issue warnings or errors if your program has no segment of
5968 The above file, when assembled into a \c{.OBJ} file, will link on
5969 its own to a valid \c{.EXE} file, which when run will print `hello,
5970 world' and then exit.
5973 \S{binexe} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.EXE} Files
5975 The \c{.EXE} file format is simple enough that it's possible to
5976 build a \c{.EXE} file by writing a pure-binary program and sticking
5977 a 32-byte header on the front. This header is simple enough that it
5978 can be generated using \c{DB} and \c{DW} commands by NASM itself, so
5979 that you can use the \c{bin} output format to directly generate
5982 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
5983 subdirectory, is a file \i\c{exebin.mac} of macros. It defines three
5984 macros: \i\c{EXE_begin}, \i\c{EXE_stack} and \i\c{EXE_end}.
5986 To produce a \c{.EXE} file using this method, you should start by
5987 using \c{%include} to load the \c{exebin.mac} macro package into
5988 your source file. You should then issue the \c{EXE_begin} macro call
5989 (which takes no arguments) to generate the file header data. Then
5990 write code as normal for the \c{bin} format - you can use all three
5991 standard sections \c{.text}, \c{.data} and \c{.bss}. At the end of
5992 the file you should call the \c{EXE_end} macro (again, no arguments),
5993 which defines some symbols to mark section sizes, and these symbols
5994 are referred to in the header code generated by \c{EXE_begin}.
5996 In this model, the code you end up writing starts at \c{0x100}, just
5997 like a \c{.COM} file - in fact, if you strip off the 32-byte header
5998 from the resulting \c{.EXE} file, you will have a valid \c{.COM}
5999 program. All the segment bases are the same, so you are limited to a
6000 64K program, again just like a \c{.COM} file. Note that an \c{ORG}
6001 directive is issued by the \c{EXE_begin} macro, so you should not
6002 explicitly issue one of your own.
6004 You can't directly refer to your segment base value, unfortunately,
6005 since this would require a relocation in the header, and things
6006 would get a lot more complicated. So you should get your segment
6007 base by copying it out of \c{CS} instead.
6009 On entry to your \c{.EXE} file, \c{SS:SP} are already set up to
6010 point to the top of a 2Kb stack. You can adjust the default stack
6011 size of 2Kb by calling the \c{EXE_stack} macro. For example, to
6012 change the stack size of your program to 64 bytes, you would call
6015 A sample program which generates a \c{.EXE} file in this way is
6016 given in the \c{test} subdirectory of the NASM archive, as
6020 \H{comfiles} Producing \i\c{.COM} Files
6022 While large DOS programs must be written as \c{.EXE} files, small
6023 ones are often better written as \c{.COM} files. \c{.COM} files are
6024 pure binary, and therefore most easily produced using the \c{bin}
6028 \S{combinfmt} Using the \c{bin} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6030 \c{.COM} files expect to be loaded at offset \c{100h} into their
6031 segment (though the segment may change). Execution then begins at
6032 \I\c{ORG}\c{100h}, i.e. right at the start of the program. So to
6033 write a \c{.COM} program, you would create a source file looking
6041 \c ; put your code here
6045 \c ; put data items here
6049 \c ; put uninitialized data here
6051 The \c{bin} format puts the \c{.text} section first in the file, so
6052 you can declare data or BSS items before beginning to write code if
6053 you want to and the code will still end up at the front of the file
6056 The BSS (uninitialized data) section does not take up space in the
6057 \c{.COM} file itself: instead, addresses of BSS items are resolved
6058 to point at space beyond the end of the file, on the grounds that
6059 this will be free memory when the program is run. Therefore you
6060 should not rely on your BSS being initialized to all zeros when you
6063 To assemble the above program, you should use a command line like
6065 \c nasm myprog.asm -fbin -o myprog.com
6067 The \c{bin} format would produce a file called \c{myprog} if no
6068 explicit output file name were specified, so you have to override it
6069 and give the desired file name.
6072 \S{comobjfmt} Using the \c{obj} Format To Generate \c{.COM} Files
6074 If you are writing a \c{.COM} program as more than one module, you
6075 may wish to assemble several \c{.OBJ} files and link them together
6076 into a \c{.COM} program. You can do this, provided you have a linker
6077 capable of outputting \c{.COM} files directly (\i{TLINK} does this),
6078 or alternatively a converter program such as \i\c{EXE2BIN} to
6079 transform the \c{.EXE} file output from the linker into a \c{.COM}
6082 If you do this, you need to take care of several things:
6084 \b The first object file containing code should start its code
6085 segment with a line like \c{RESB 100h}. This is to ensure that the
6086 code begins at offset \c{100h} relative to the beginning of the code
6087 segment, so that the linker or converter program does not have to
6088 adjust address references within the file when generating the
6089 \c{.COM} file. Other assemblers use an \i\c{ORG} directive for this
6090 purpose, but \c{ORG} in NASM is a format-specific directive to the
6091 \c{bin} output format, and does not mean the same thing as it does
6092 in MASM-compatible assemblers.
6094 \b You don't need to define a stack segment.
6096 \b All your segments should be in the same group, so that every time
6097 your code or data references a symbol offset, all offsets are
6098 relative to the same segment base. This is because, when a \c{.COM}
6099 file is loaded, all the segment registers contain the same value.
6102 \H{sysfiles} Producing \i\c{.SYS} Files
6104 \i{MS-DOS device drivers} - \c{.SYS} files - are pure binary files,
6105 similar to \c{.COM} files, except that they start at origin zero
6106 rather than \c{100h}. Therefore, if you are writing a device driver
6107 using the \c{bin} format, you do not need the \c{ORG} directive,
6108 since the default origin for \c{bin} is zero. Similarly, if you are
6109 using \c{obj}, you do not need the \c{RESB 100h} at the start of
6112 \c{.SYS} files start with a header structure, containing pointers to
6113 the various routines inside the driver which do the work. This
6114 structure should be defined at the start of the code segment, even
6115 though it is not actually code.
6117 For more information on the format of \c{.SYS} files, and the data
6118 which has to go in the header structure, a list of books is given in
6119 the Frequently Asked Questions list for the newsgroup
6120 \W{news:comp.os.msdos.programmer}\i\c{comp.os.msdos.programmer}.
6123 \H{16c} Interfacing to 16-bit C Programs
6125 This section covers the basics of writing assembly routines that
6126 call, or are called from, C programs. To do this, you would
6127 typically write an assembly module as a \c{.OBJ} file, and link it
6128 with your C modules to produce a \i{mixed-language program}.
6131 \S{16cunder} External Symbol Names
6133 \I{C symbol names}\I{underscore, in C symbols}C compilers have the
6134 convention that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6135 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6136 appears in the C program. So, for example, the function a C
6137 programmer thinks of as \c{printf} appears to an assembly language
6138 programmer as \c{_printf}. This means that in your assembly
6139 programs, you can define symbols without a leading underscore, and
6140 not have to worry about name clashes with C symbols.
6142 If you find the underscores inconvenient, you can define macros to
6143 replace the \c{GLOBAL} and \c{EXTERN} directives as follows:
6159 (These forms of the macros only take one argument at a time; a
6160 \c{%rep} construct could solve this.)
6162 If you then declare an external like this:
6166 then the macro will expand it as
6169 \c %define printf _printf
6171 Thereafter, you can reference \c{printf} as if it was a symbol, and
6172 the preprocessor will put the leading underscore on where necessary.
6174 The \c{cglobal} macro works similarly. You must use \c{cglobal}
6175 before defining the symbol in question, but you would have had to do
6176 that anyway if you used \c{GLOBAL}.
6178 Also see \k{opt-pfix}.
6180 \S{16cmodels} \i{Memory Models}
6182 NASM contains no mechanism to support the various C memory models
6183 directly; you have to keep track yourself of which one you are
6184 writing for. This means you have to keep track of the following
6187 \b In models using a single code segment (tiny, small and compact),
6188 functions are near. This means that function pointers, when stored
6189 in data segments or pushed on the stack as function arguments, are
6190 16 bits long and contain only an offset field (the \c{CS} register
6191 never changes its value, and always gives the segment part of the
6192 full function address), and that functions are called using ordinary
6193 near \c{CALL} instructions and return using \c{RETN} (which, in
6194 NASM, is synonymous with \c{RET} anyway). This means both that you
6195 should write your own routines to return with \c{RETN}, and that you
6196 should call external C routines with near \c{CALL} instructions.
6198 \b In models using more than one code segment (medium, large and
6199 huge), functions are far. This means that function pointers are 32
6200 bits long (consisting of a 16-bit offset followed by a 16-bit
6201 segment), and that functions are called using \c{CALL FAR} (or
6202 \c{CALL seg:offset}) and return using \c{RETF}. Again, you should
6203 therefore write your own routines to return with \c{RETF} and use
6204 \c{CALL FAR} to call external routines.
6206 \b In models using a single data segment (tiny, small and medium),
6207 data pointers are 16 bits long, containing only an offset field (the
6208 \c{DS} register doesn't change its value, and always gives the
6209 segment part of the full data item address).
6211 \b In models using more than one data segment (compact, large and
6212 huge), data pointers are 32 bits long, consisting of a 16-bit offset
6213 followed by a 16-bit segment. You should still be careful not to
6214 modify \c{DS} in your routines without restoring it afterwards, but
6215 \c{ES} is free for you to use to access the contents of 32-bit data
6216 pointers you are passed.
6218 \b The huge memory model allows single data items to exceed 64K in
6219 size. In all other memory models, you can access the whole of a data
6220 item just by doing arithmetic on the offset field of the pointer you
6221 are given, whether a segment field is present or not; in huge model,
6222 you have to be more careful of your pointer arithmetic.
6224 \b In most memory models, there is a \e{default} data segment, whose
6225 segment address is kept in \c{DS} throughout the program. This data
6226 segment is typically the same segment as the stack, kept in \c{SS},
6227 so that functions' local variables (which are stored on the stack)
6228 and global data items can both be accessed easily without changing
6229 \c{DS}. Particularly large data items are typically stored in other
6230 segments. However, some memory models (though not the standard
6231 ones, usually) allow the assumption that \c{SS} and \c{DS} hold the
6232 same value to be removed. Be careful about functions' local
6233 variables in this latter case.
6235 In models with a single code segment, the segment is called
6236 \i\c{_TEXT}, so your code segment must also go by this name in order
6237 to be linked into the same place as the main code segment. In models
6238 with a single data segment, or with a default data segment, it is
6242 \S{16cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6244 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention} in
6245 16-bit programs is as follows. In the following description, the
6246 words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote the function
6247 doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6249 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6250 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6251 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6253 \b The caller then executes a \c{CALL} instruction to pass control
6254 to the callee. This \c{CALL} is either near or far depending on the
6257 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6258 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6259 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6260 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6261 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6262 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6263 any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as
6264 a \i\e{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6266 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6267 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6268 pushed; the next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6269 return address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. In a small-model
6270 (near) function, the parameters start after that, at \c{[BP+4]}; in
6271 a large-model (far) function, the segment part of the return address
6272 lives at \c{[BP+4]}, and the parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The
6273 leftmost parameter of the function, since it was pushed last, is
6274 accessible at this offset from \c{BP}; the others follow, at
6275 successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function such as \c{printf}
6276 which takes a variable number of parameters, the pushing of the
6277 parameters in reverse order means that the function knows where to
6278 find its first parameter, which tells it the number and type of the
6281 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6282 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6283 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6285 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6286 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6287 of the value. Floating-point results are sometimes (depending on the
6288 compiler) returned in \c{ST0}.
6290 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6291 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6292 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETN} or \c{RETF} depending on
6295 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6296 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6297 constant to \c{SP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6298 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6299 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6300 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6301 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6304 It is instructive to compare this calling convention with that for
6305 Pascal programs (described in \k{16bpfunc}). Pascal has a simpler
6306 convention, since no functions have variable numbers of parameters.
6307 Therefore the callee knows how many parameters it should have been
6308 passed, and is able to deallocate them from the stack itself by
6309 passing an immediate argument to the \c{RET} or \c{RETF}
6310 instruction, so the caller does not have to do it. Also, the
6311 parameters are pushed in left-to-right order, not right-to-left,
6312 which means that a compiler can give better guarantees about
6313 sequence points without performance suffering.
6315 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way.
6316 The following example is for small model:
6323 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6324 \c mov bx,[bp+4] ; first parameter to function
6328 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6332 For a large-model function, you would replace \c{RET} by \c{RETF},
6333 and look for the first parameter at \c{[BP+6]} instead of
6334 \c{[BP+4]}. Of course, if one of the parameters is a pointer, then
6335 the offsets of \e{subsequent} parameters will change depending on
6336 the memory model as well: far pointers take up four bytes on the
6337 stack when passed as a parameter, whereas near pointers take up two.
6339 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6340 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6344 \c ; and then, further down...
6346 \c push word [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6347 \c push word mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6349 \c add sp,byte 4 ; `byte' saves space
6351 \c ; then those data items...
6356 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6358 This piece of code is the small-model assembly equivalent of the C
6361 \c int myint = 1234;
6362 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6364 In large model, the function-call code might look more like this. In
6365 this example, it is assumed that \c{DS} already holds the segment
6366 base of the segment \c{_DATA}. If not, you would have to initialize
6369 \c push word [myint]
6370 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6371 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6375 The integer value still takes up one word on the stack, since large
6376 model does not affect the size of the \c{int} data type. The first
6377 argument (pushed last) to \c{printf}, however, is a data pointer,
6378 and therefore has to contain a segment and offset part. The segment
6379 should be stored second in memory, and therefore must be pushed
6380 first. (Of course, \c{PUSH DS} would have been a shorter instruction
6381 than \c{PUSH WORD SEG mystring}, if \c{DS} was set up as the above
6382 example assumed.) Then the actual call becomes a far call, since
6383 functions expect far calls in large model; and \c{SP} has to be
6384 increased by 6 rather than 4 afterwards to make up for the extra
6388 \S{16cdata} Accessing Data Items
6390 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6391 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6392 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6393 in \k{16cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6394 accessed from assembler as
6400 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6401 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6402 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6408 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6409 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are two bytes long, so if
6410 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6411 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+6]}. (The byte offset 6 is obtained
6412 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6413 element, 2.) The sizes of the C base types in 16-bit compilers are:
6414 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short} and \c{int}, 4 for \c{long} and
6415 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}.
6417 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6418 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6419 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6420 NASM structure definition (using \i\c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6421 one offset and using just that.
6423 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6424 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6425 alignment to structure members in its own \c{STRUC} macro, so you
6426 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6427 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6434 might be four bytes long rather than three, since the \c{int} field
6435 would be aligned to a two-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6436 feature tends to be a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6437 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6438 out how your own compiler does it.
6441 \S{16cmacro} \i\c{c16.mac}: Helper Macros for the 16-bit C Interface
6443 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc subdirectory}\c{misc}
6444 directory, is a file \c{c16.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6445 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6446 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6447 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6449 (An alternative, TASM compatible form of \c{arg} is also now built
6450 into NASM's preprocessor. See \k{stackrel} for details.)
6452 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6459 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6460 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6465 This defines \c{_nearproc} to be a procedure taking two arguments,
6466 the first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6467 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6469 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6470 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6471 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6472 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6473 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6474 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6475 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6477 The macro set produces code for near functions (tiny, small and
6478 compact-model code) by default. You can have it generate far
6479 functions (medium, large and huge-model code) by means of coding
6480 \I\c{FARCODE}\c{%define FARCODE}. This changes the kind of return
6481 instruction generated by \c{endproc}, and also changes the starting
6482 point for the argument offsets. The macro set contains no intrinsic
6483 dependency on whether data pointers are far or not.
6485 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6486 argument. If no size is given, 2 is assumed, since it is likely that
6487 many function parameters will be of type \c{int}.
6489 The large-model equivalent of the above function would look like this:
6497 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6498 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6499 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6504 This makes use of the argument to the \c{arg} macro to define a
6505 parameter of size 4, because \c{j} is now a far pointer. When we
6506 load from \c{j}, we must load a segment and an offset.
6509 \H{16bp} Interfacing to \i{Borland Pascal} Programs
6511 Interfacing to Borland Pascal programs is similar in concept to
6512 interfacing to 16-bit C programs. The differences are:
6514 \b The leading underscore required for interfacing to C programs is
6515 not required for Pascal.
6517 \b The memory model is always large: functions are far, data
6518 pointers are far, and no data item can be more than 64K long.
6519 (Actually, some functions are near, but only those functions that
6520 are local to a Pascal unit and never called from outside it. All
6521 assembly functions that Pascal calls, and all Pascal functions that
6522 assembly routines are able to call, are far.) However, all static
6523 data declared in a Pascal program goes into the default data
6524 segment, which is the one whose segment address will be in \c{DS}
6525 when control is passed to your assembly code. The only things that
6526 do not live in the default data segment are local variables (they
6527 live in the stack segment) and dynamically allocated variables. All
6528 data \e{pointers}, however, are far.
6530 \b The function calling convention is different - described below.
6532 \b Some data types, such as strings, are stored differently.
6534 \b There are restrictions on the segment names you are allowed to
6535 use - Borland Pascal will ignore code or data declared in a segment
6536 it doesn't like the name of. The restrictions are described below.
6539 \S{16bpfunc} The Pascal Calling Convention
6541 \I{functions, Pascal calling convention}\I{Pascal calling
6542 convention}The 16-bit Pascal calling convention is as follows. In
6543 the following description, the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are
6544 used to denote the function doing the calling and the function which
6547 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6548 after another, in normal order (left to right, so that the first
6549 argument specified to the function is pushed first).
6551 \b The caller then executes a far \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6552 control to the callee.
6554 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6555 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6556 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{SP} in \c{BP} so as to
6557 be able to use \c{BP} as a base pointer to find its parameters on
6558 the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so part
6559 of the calling convention states that \c{BP} must be preserved by
6560 any function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up \c{BP} as a
6561 \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6563 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{BP}.
6564 The word at \c{[BP]} holds the previous value of \c{BP} as it was
6565 pushed. The next word, at \c{[BP+2]}, holds the offset part of the
6566 return address, and the next one at \c{[BP+4]} the segment part. The
6567 parameters begin at \c{[BP+6]}. The rightmost parameter of the
6568 function, since it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset
6569 from \c{BP}; the others follow, at successively greater offsets.
6571 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{SP} further, so as to
6572 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6573 accessible at negative offsets from \c{BP}.
6575 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6576 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{DX:AX} depending on the size
6577 of the value. Floating-point results are returned in \c{ST0}.
6578 Results of type \c{Real} (Borland's own custom floating-point data
6579 type, not handled directly by the FPU) are returned in \c{DX:BX:AX}.
6580 To return a result of type \c{String}, the caller pushes a pointer
6581 to a temporary string before pushing the parameters, and the callee
6582 places the returned string value at that location. The pointer is
6583 not a parameter, and should not be removed from the stack by the
6584 \c{RETF} instruction.
6586 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{SP} from
6587 \c{BP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6588 value of \c{BP}, and returns via \c{RETF}. It uses the form of
6589 \c{RETF} with an immediate parameter, giving the number of bytes
6590 taken up by the parameters on the stack. This causes the parameters
6591 to be removed from the stack as a side effect of the return
6594 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6595 parameters have already been removed from the stack, so it needs to
6598 Thus, you would define a function in Pascal style, taking two
6599 \c{Integer}-type parameters, in the following way:
6605 \c sub sp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6606 \c mov bx,[bp+8] ; first parameter to function
6607 \c mov bx,[bp+6] ; second parameter to function
6611 \c mov sp,bp ; undo "sub sp,0x40" above
6613 \c retf 4 ; total size of params is 4
6615 At the other end of the process, to call a Pascal function from your
6616 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6620 \c ; and then, further down...
6622 \c push word seg mystring ; Now push the segment, and...
6623 \c push word mystring ; ... offset of "mystring"
6624 \c push word [myint] ; one of my variables
6625 \c call far SomeFunc
6627 This is equivalent to the Pascal code
6629 \c procedure SomeFunc(String: PChar; Int: Integer);
6630 \c SomeFunc(@mystring, myint);
6633 \S{16bpseg} Borland Pascal \I{segment names, Borland Pascal}Segment
6636 Since Borland Pascal's internal unit file format is completely
6637 different from \c{OBJ}, it only makes a very sketchy job of actually
6638 reading and understanding the various information contained in a
6639 real \c{OBJ} file when it links that in. Therefore an object file
6640 intended to be linked to a Pascal program must obey a number of
6643 \b Procedures and functions must be in a segment whose name is
6644 either \c{CODE}, \c{CSEG}, or something ending in \c{_TEXT}.
6646 \b initialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6647 \c{CONST} or something ending in \c{_DATA}.
6649 \b Uninitialized data must be in a segment whose name is either
6650 \c{DATA}, \c{DSEG}, or something ending in \c{_BSS}.
6652 \b Any other segments in the object file are completely ignored.
6653 \c{GROUP} directives and segment attributes are also ignored.
6656 \S{16bpmacro} Using \i\c{c16.mac} With Pascal Programs
6658 The \c{c16.mac} macro package, described in \k{16cmacro}, can also
6659 be used to simplify writing functions to be called from Pascal
6660 programs, if you code \I\c{PASCAL}\c{%define PASCAL}. This
6661 definition ensures that functions are far (it implies
6662 \i\c{FARCODE}), and also causes procedure return instructions to be
6663 generated with an operand.
6665 Defining \c{PASCAL} does not change the code which calculates the
6666 argument offsets; you must declare your function's arguments in
6667 reverse order. For example:
6675 \c mov ax,[bp + %$i]
6676 \c mov bx,[bp + %$j]
6677 \c mov es,[bp + %$j + 2]
6682 This defines the same routine, conceptually, as the example in
6683 \k{16cmacro}: it defines a function taking two arguments, an integer
6684 and a pointer to an integer, which returns the sum of the integer
6685 and the contents of the pointer. The only difference between this
6686 code and the large-model C version is that \c{PASCAL} is defined
6687 instead of \c{FARCODE}, and that the arguments are declared in
6691 \C{32bit} Writing 32-bit Code (Unix, Win32, DJGPP)
6693 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved
6694 when writing 32-bit code, to run under \i{Win32} or Unix, or to be
6695 linked with C code generated by a Unix-style C compiler such as
6696 \i{DJGPP}. It covers how to write assembly code to interface with
6697 32-bit C routines, and how to write position-independent code for
6700 Almost all 32-bit code, and in particular all code running under
6701 \c{Win32}, \c{DJGPP} or any of the PC Unix variants, runs in \I{flat
6702 memory model}\e{flat} memory model. This means that the segment registers
6703 and paging have already been set up to give you the same 32-bit 4Gb
6704 address space no matter what segment you work relative to, and that
6705 you should ignore all segment registers completely. When writing
6706 flat-model application code, you never need to use a segment
6707 override or modify any segment register, and the code-section
6708 addresses you pass to \c{CALL} and \c{JMP} live in the same address
6709 space as the data-section addresses you access your variables by and
6710 the stack-section addresses you access local variables and procedure
6711 parameters by. Every address is 32 bits long and contains only an
6715 \H{32c} Interfacing to 32-bit C Programs
6717 A lot of the discussion in \k{16c}, about interfacing to 16-bit C
6718 programs, still applies when working in 32 bits. The absence of
6719 memory models or segmentation worries simplifies things a lot.
6722 \S{32cunder} External Symbol Names
6724 Most 32-bit C compilers share the convention used by 16-bit
6725 compilers, that the names of all global symbols (functions or data)
6726 they define are formed by prefixing an underscore to the name as it
6727 appears in the C program. However, not all of them do: the \c{ELF}
6728 specification states that C symbols do \e{not} have a leading
6729 underscore on their assembly-language names.
6731 The older Linux \c{a.out} C compiler, all \c{Win32} compilers,
6732 \c{DJGPP}, and \c{NetBSD} and \c{FreeBSD}, all use the leading
6733 underscore; for these compilers, the macros \c{cextern} and
6734 \c{cglobal}, as given in \k{16cunder}, will still work. For \c{ELF},
6735 though, the leading underscore should not be used.
6737 See also \k{opt-pfix}.
6739 \S{32cfunc} Function Definitions and Function Calls
6741 \I{functions, C calling convention}The \i{C calling convention}
6742 in 32-bit programs is as follows. In the following description,
6743 the words \e{caller} and \e{callee} are used to denote
6744 the function doing the calling and the function which gets called.
6746 \b The caller pushes the function's parameters on the stack, one
6747 after another, in reverse order (right to left, so that the first
6748 argument specified to the function is pushed last).
6750 \b The caller then executes a near \c{CALL} instruction to pass
6751 control to the callee.
6753 \b The callee receives control, and typically (although this is not
6754 actually necessary, in functions which do not need to access their
6755 parameters) starts by saving the value of \c{ESP} in \c{EBP} so as
6756 to be able to use \c{EBP} as a base pointer to find its parameters
6757 on the stack. However, the caller was probably doing this too, so
6758 part of the calling convention states that \c{EBP} must be preserved
6759 by any C function. Hence the callee, if it is going to set up
6760 \c{EBP} as a \i{frame pointer}, must push the previous value first.
6762 \b The callee may then access its parameters relative to \c{EBP}.
6763 The doubleword at \c{[EBP]} holds the previous value of \c{EBP} as
6764 it was pushed; the next doubleword, at \c{[EBP+4]}, holds the return
6765 address, pushed implicitly by \c{CALL}. The parameters start after
6766 that, at \c{[EBP+8]}. The leftmost parameter of the function, since
6767 it was pushed last, is accessible at this offset from \c{EBP}; the
6768 others follow, at successively greater offsets. Thus, in a function
6769 such as \c{printf} which takes a variable number of parameters, the
6770 pushing of the parameters in reverse order means that the function
6771 knows where to find its first parameter, which tells it the number
6772 and type of the remaining ones.
6774 \b The callee may also wish to decrease \c{ESP} further, so as to
6775 allocate space on the stack for local variables, which will then be
6776 accessible at negative offsets from \c{EBP}.
6778 \b The callee, if it wishes to return a value to the caller, should
6779 leave the value in \c{AL}, \c{AX} or \c{EAX} depending on the size
6780 of the value. Floating-point results are typically returned in
6783 \b Once the callee has finished processing, it restores \c{ESP} from
6784 \c{EBP} if it had allocated local stack space, then pops the previous
6785 value of \c{EBP}, and returns via \c{RET} (equivalently, \c{RETN}).
6787 \b When the caller regains control from the callee, the function
6788 parameters are still on the stack, so it typically adds an immediate
6789 constant to \c{ESP} to remove them (instead of executing a number of
6790 slow \c{POP} instructions). Thus, if a function is accidentally
6791 called with the wrong number of parameters due to a prototype
6792 mismatch, the stack will still be returned to a sensible state since
6793 the caller, which \e{knows} how many parameters it pushed, does the
6796 There is an alternative calling convention used by Win32 programs
6797 for Windows API calls, and also for functions called \e{by} the
6798 Windows API such as window procedures: they follow what Microsoft
6799 calls the \c{__stdcall} convention. This is slightly closer to the
6800 Pascal convention, in that the callee clears the stack by passing a
6801 parameter to the \c{RET} instruction. However, the parameters are
6802 still pushed in right-to-left order.
6804 Thus, you would define a function in C style in the following way:
6811 \c sub esp,0x40 ; 64 bytes of local stack space
6812 \c mov ebx,[ebp+8] ; first parameter to function
6816 \c leave ; mov esp,ebp / pop ebp
6819 At the other end of the process, to call a C function from your
6820 assembly code, you would do something like this:
6824 \c ; and then, further down...
6826 \c push dword [myint] ; one of my integer variables
6827 \c push dword mystring ; pointer into my data segment
6829 \c add esp,byte 8 ; `byte' saves space
6831 \c ; then those data items...
6836 \c mystring db 'This number -> %d <- should be 1234',10,0
6838 This piece of code is the assembly equivalent of the C code
6840 \c int myint = 1234;
6841 \c printf("This number -> %d <- should be 1234\n", myint);
6844 \S{32cdata} Accessing Data Items
6846 To get at the contents of C variables, or to declare variables which
6847 C can access, you need only declare the names as \c{GLOBAL} or
6848 \c{EXTERN}. (Again, the names require leading underscores, as stated
6849 in \k{32cunder}.) Thus, a C variable declared as \c{int i} can be
6850 accessed from assembler as
6855 And to declare your own integer variable which C programs can access
6856 as \c{extern int j}, you do this (making sure you are assembling in
6857 the \c{_DATA} segment, if necessary):
6862 To access a C array, you need to know the size of the components of
6863 the array. For example, \c{int} variables are four bytes long, so if
6864 a C program declares an array as \c{int a[10]}, you can access
6865 \c{a[3]} by coding \c{mov ax,[_a+12]}. (The byte offset 12 is obtained
6866 by multiplying the desired array index, 3, by the size of the array
6867 element, 4.) The sizes of the C base types in 32-bit compilers are:
6868 1 for \c{char}, 2 for \c{short}, 4 for \c{int}, \c{long} and
6869 \c{float}, and 8 for \c{double}. Pointers, being 32-bit addresses,
6870 are also 4 bytes long.
6872 To access a C \i{data structure}, you need to know the offset from
6873 the base of the structure to the field you are interested in. You
6874 can either do this by converting the C structure definition into a
6875 NASM structure definition (using \c{STRUC}), or by calculating the
6876 one offset and using just that.
6878 To do either of these, you should read your C compiler's manual to
6879 find out how it organizes data structures. NASM gives no special
6880 alignment to structure members in its own \i\c{STRUC} macro, so you
6881 have to specify alignment yourself if the C compiler generates it.
6882 Typically, you might find that a structure like
6889 might be eight bytes long rather than five, since the \c{int} field
6890 would be aligned to a four-byte boundary. However, this sort of
6891 feature is sometimes a configurable option in the C compiler, either
6892 using command-line options or \c{#pragma} lines, so you have to find
6893 out how your own compiler does it.
6896 \S{32cmacro} \i\c{c32.mac}: Helper Macros for the 32-bit C Interface
6898 Included in the NASM archives, in the \I{misc directory}\c{misc}
6899 directory, is a file \c{c32.mac} of macros. It defines three macros:
6900 \i\c{proc}, \i\c{arg} and \i\c{endproc}. These are intended to be
6901 used for C-style procedure definitions, and they automate a lot of
6902 the work involved in keeping track of the calling convention.
6904 An example of an assembly function using the macro set is given
6911 \c mov eax,[ebp + %$i]
6912 \c mov ebx,[ebp + %$j]
6917 This defines \c{_proc32} to be a procedure taking two arguments, the
6918 first (\c{i}) an integer and the second (\c{j}) a pointer to an
6919 integer. It returns \c{i + *j}.
6921 Note that the \c{arg} macro has an \c{EQU} as the first line of its
6922 expansion, and since the label before the macro call gets prepended
6923 to the first line of the expanded macro, the \c{EQU} works, defining
6924 \c{%$i} to be an offset from \c{BP}. A context-local variable is
6925 used, local to the context pushed by the \c{proc} macro and popped
6926 by the \c{endproc} macro, so that the same argument name can be used
6927 in later procedures. Of course, you don't \e{have} to do that.
6929 \c{arg} can take an optional parameter, giving the size of the
6930 argument. If no size is given, 4 is assumed, since it is likely that
6931 many function parameters will be of type \c{int} or pointers.
6934 \H{picdll} Writing NetBSD/FreeBSD/OpenBSD and Linux/ELF \i{Shared
6937 \c{ELF} replaced the older \c{a.out} object file format under Linux
6938 because it contains support for \i{position-independent code}
6939 (\i{PIC}), which makes writing shared libraries much easier. NASM
6940 supports the \c{ELF} position-independent code features, so you can
6941 write Linux \c{ELF} shared libraries in NASM.
6943 \i{NetBSD}, and its close cousins \i{FreeBSD} and \i{OpenBSD}, take
6944 a different approach by hacking PIC support into the \c{a.out}
6945 format. NASM supports this as the \i\c{aoutb} output format, so you
6946 can write \i{BSD} shared libraries in NASM too.
6948 The operating system loads a PIC shared library by memory-mapping
6949 the library file at an arbitrarily chosen point in the address space
6950 of the running process. The contents of the library's code section
6951 must therefore not depend on where it is loaded in memory.
6953 Therefore, you cannot get at your variables by writing code like
6956 \c mov eax,[myvar] ; WRONG
6958 Instead, the linker provides an area of memory called the
6959 \i\e{global offset table}, or \i{GOT}; the GOT is situated at a
6960 constant distance from your library's code, so if you can find out
6961 where your library is loaded (which is typically done using a
6962 \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination), you can obtain the address of the
6963 GOT, and you can then load the addresses of your variables out of
6964 linker-generated entries in the GOT.
6966 The \e{data} section of a PIC shared library does not have these
6967 restrictions: since the data section is writable, it has to be
6968 copied into memory anyway rather than just paged in from the library
6969 file, so as long as it's being copied it can be relocated too. So
6970 you can put ordinary types of relocation in the data section without
6971 too much worry (but see \k{picglobal} for a caveat).
6974 \S{picgot} Obtaining the Address of the GOT
6976 Each code module in your shared library should define the GOT as an
6979 \c extern _GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in ELF
6980 \c extern __GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_ ; in BSD a.out
6982 At the beginning of any function in your shared library which plans
6983 to access your data or BSS sections, you must first calculate the
6984 address of the GOT. This is typically done by writing the function
6993 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-.get_GOT wrt ..gotpc
6995 \c ; the function body comes here
7002 (For BSD, again, the symbol \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE} requires a
7003 second leading underscore.)
7005 The first two lines of this function are simply the standard C
7006 prologue to set up a stack frame, and the last three lines are
7007 standard C function epilogue. The third line, and the fourth to last
7008 line, save and restore the \c{EBX} register, because PIC shared
7009 libraries use this register to store the address of the GOT.
7011 The interesting bit is the \c{CALL} instruction and the following
7012 two lines. The \c{CALL} and \c{POP} combination obtains the address
7013 of the label \c{.get_GOT}, without having to know in advance where
7014 the program was loaded (since the \c{CALL} instruction is encoded
7015 relative to the current position). The \c{ADD} instruction makes use
7016 of one of the special PIC relocation types: \i{GOTPC relocation}.
7017 With the \i\c{WRT ..gotpc} qualifier specified, the symbol
7018 referenced (here \c{_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_}, the special symbol
7019 assigned to the GOT) is given as an offset from the beginning of the
7020 section. (Actually, \c{ELF} encodes it as the offset from the operand
7021 field of the \c{ADD} instruction, but NASM simplifies this
7022 deliberately, so you do things the same way for both \c{ELF} and
7023 \c{BSD}.) So the instruction then \e{adds} the beginning of the section,
7024 to get the real address of the GOT, and subtracts the value of
7025 \c{.get_GOT} which it knows is in \c{EBX}. Therefore, by the time
7026 that instruction has finished, \c{EBX} contains the address of the GOT.
7028 If you didn't follow that, don't worry: it's never necessary to
7029 obtain the address of the GOT by any other means, so you can put
7030 those three instructions into a macro and safely ignore them:
7037 \c add ebx,_GLOBAL_OFFSET_TABLE_+$$-%%getgot wrt ..gotpc
7041 \S{piclocal} Finding Your Local Data Items
7043 Having got the GOT, you can then use it to obtain the addresses of
7044 your data items. Most variables will reside in the sections you have
7045 declared; they can be accessed using the \I{GOTOFF
7046 relocation}\c{..gotoff} special \I\c{WRT ..gotoff}\c{WRT} type. The
7047 way this works is like this:
7049 \c lea eax,[ebx+myvar wrt ..gotoff]
7051 The expression \c{myvar wrt ..gotoff} is calculated, when the shared
7052 library is linked, to be the offset to the local variable \c{myvar}
7053 from the beginning of the GOT. Therefore, adding it to \c{EBX} as
7054 above will place the real address of \c{myvar} in \c{EAX}.
7056 If you declare variables as \c{GLOBAL} without specifying a size for
7057 them, they are shared between code modules in the library, but do
7058 not get exported from the library to the program that loaded it.
7059 They will still be in your ordinary data and BSS sections, so you
7060 can access them in the same way as local variables, using the above
7061 \c{..gotoff} mechanism.
7063 Note that due to a peculiarity of the way BSD \c{a.out} format
7064 handles this relocation type, there must be at least one non-local
7065 symbol in the same section as the address you're trying to access.
7068 \S{picextern} Finding External and Common Data Items
7070 If your library needs to get at an external variable (external to
7071 the \e{library}, not just to one of the modules within it), you must
7072 use the \I{GOT relocations}\I\c{WRT ..got}\c{..got} type to get at
7073 it. The \c{..got} type, instead of giving you the offset from the
7074 GOT base to the variable, gives you the offset from the GOT base to
7075 a GOT \e{entry} containing the address of the variable. The linker
7076 will set up this GOT entry when it builds the library, and the
7077 dynamic linker will place the correct address in it at load time. So
7078 to obtain the address of an external variable \c{extvar} in \c{EAX},
7081 \c mov eax,[ebx+extvar wrt ..got]
7083 This loads the address of \c{extvar} out of an entry in the GOT. The
7084 linker, when it builds the shared library, collects together every
7085 relocation of type \c{..got}, and builds the GOT so as to ensure it
7086 has every necessary entry present.
7088 Common variables must also be accessed in this way.
7091 \S{picglobal} Exporting Symbols to the Library User
7093 If you want to export symbols to the user of the library, you have
7094 to declare whether they are functions or data, and if they are data,
7095 you have to give the size of the data item. This is because the
7096 dynamic linker has to build \I{PLT}\i{procedure linkage table}
7097 entries for any exported functions, and also moves exported data
7098 items away from the library's data section in which they were
7101 So to export a function to users of the library, you must use
7103 \c global func:function ; declare it as a function
7109 And to export a data item such as an array, you would have to code
7111 \c global array:data array.end-array ; give the size too
7116 Be careful: If you export a variable to the library user, by
7117 declaring it as \c{GLOBAL} and supplying a size, the variable will
7118 end up living in the data section of the main program, rather than
7119 in your library's data section, where you declared it. So you will
7120 have to access your own global variable with the \c{..got} mechanism
7121 rather than \c{..gotoff}, as if it were external (which,
7122 effectively, it has become).
7124 Equally, if you need to store the address of an exported global in
7125 one of your data sections, you can't do it by means of the standard
7128 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item ; WRONG
7130 NASM will interpret this code as an ordinary relocation, in which
7131 \c{global_data_item} is merely an offset from the beginning of the
7132 \c{.data} section (or whatever); so this reference will end up
7133 pointing at your data section instead of at the exported global
7134 which resides elsewhere.
7136 Instead of the above code, then, you must write
7138 \c dataptr: dd global_data_item wrt ..sym
7140 which makes use of the special \c{WRT} type \I\c{WRT ..sym}\c{..sym}
7141 to instruct NASM to search the symbol table for a particular symbol
7142 at that address, rather than just relocating by section base.
7144 Either method will work for functions: referring to one of your
7145 functions by means of
7147 \c funcptr: dd my_function
7149 will give the user the address of the code you wrote, whereas
7151 \c funcptr: dd my_function wrt .sym
7153 will give the address of the procedure linkage table for the
7154 function, which is where the calling program will \e{believe} the
7155 function lives. Either address is a valid way to call the function.
7158 \S{picproc} Calling Procedures Outside the Library
7160 Calling procedures outside your shared library has to be done by
7161 means of a \i\e{procedure linkage table}, or \i{PLT}. The PLT is
7162 placed at a known offset from where the library is loaded, so the
7163 library code can make calls to the PLT in a position-independent
7164 way. Within the PLT there is code to jump to offsets contained in
7165 the GOT, so function calls to other shared libraries or to routines
7166 in the main program can be transparently passed off to their real
7169 To call an external routine, you must use another special PIC
7170 relocation type, \I{PLT relocations}\i\c{WRT ..plt}. This is much
7171 easier than the GOT-based ones: you simply replace calls such as
7172 \c{CALL printf} with the PLT-relative version \c{CALL printf WRT
7176 \S{link} Generating the Library File
7178 Having written some code modules and assembled them to \c{.o} files,
7179 you then generate your shared library with a command such as
7181 \c ld -shared -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for ELF
7182 \c ld -Bshareable -o library.so module1.o module2.o # for BSD
7184 For ELF, if your shared library is going to reside in system
7185 directories such as \c{/usr/lib} or \c{/lib}, it is usually worth
7186 using the \i\c{-soname} flag to the linker, to store the final
7187 library file name, with a version number, into the library:
7189 \c ld -shared -soname library.so.1 -o library.so.1.2 *.o
7191 You would then copy \c{library.so.1.2} into the library directory,
7192 and create \c{library.so.1} as a symbolic link to it.
7195 \C{mixsize} Mixing 16 and 32 Bit Code
7197 This chapter tries to cover some of the issues, largely related to
7198 unusual forms of addressing and jump instructions, encountered when
7199 writing operating system code such as protected-mode initialisation
7200 routines, which require code that operates in mixed segment sizes,
7201 such as code in a 16-bit segment trying to modify data in a 32-bit
7202 one, or jumps between different-size segments.
7205 \H{mixjump} Mixed-Size Jumps\I{jumps, mixed-size}
7207 \I{operating system, writing}\I{writing operating systems}The most
7208 common form of \i{mixed-size instruction} is the one used when
7209 writing a 32-bit OS: having done your setup in 16-bit mode, such as
7210 loading the kernel, you then have to boot it by switching into
7211 protected mode and jumping to the 32-bit kernel start address. In a
7212 fully 32-bit OS, this tends to be the \e{only} mixed-size
7213 instruction you need, since everything before it can be done in pure
7214 16-bit code, and everything after it can be pure 32-bit.
7216 This jump must specify a 48-bit far address, since the target
7217 segment is a 32-bit one. However, it must be assembled in a 16-bit
7218 segment, so just coding, for example,
7220 \c jmp 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; wrong!
7222 will not work, since the offset part of the address will be
7223 truncated to \c{0x9ABC} and the jump will be an ordinary 16-bit far
7226 The Linux kernel setup code gets round the inability of \c{as86} to
7227 generate the required instruction by coding it manually, using
7228 \c{DB} instructions. NASM can go one better than that, by actually
7229 generating the right instruction itself. Here's how to do it right:
7231 \c jmp dword 0x1234:0x56789ABC ; right
7233 \I\c{JMP DWORD}The \c{DWORD} prefix (strictly speaking, it should
7234 come \e{after} the colon, since it is declaring the \e{offset} field
7235 to be a doubleword; but NASM will accept either form, since both are
7236 unambiguous) forces the offset part to be treated as far, in the
7237 assumption that you are deliberately writing a jump from a 16-bit
7238 segment to a 32-bit one.
7240 You can do the reverse operation, jumping from a 32-bit segment to a
7241 16-bit one, by means of the \c{WORD} prefix:
7243 \c jmp word 0x8765:0x4321 ; 32 to 16 bit
7245 If the \c{WORD} prefix is specified in 16-bit mode, or the \c{DWORD}
7246 prefix in 32-bit mode, they will be ignored, since each is
7247 explicitly forcing NASM into a mode it was in anyway.
7250 \H{mixaddr} Addressing Between Different-Size Segments\I{addressing,
7251 mixed-size}\I{mixed-size addressing}
7253 If your OS is mixed 16 and 32-bit, or if you are writing a DOS
7254 extender, you are likely to have to deal with some 16-bit segments
7255 and some 32-bit ones. At some point, you will probably end up
7256 writing code in a 16-bit segment which has to access data in a
7257 32-bit segment, or vice versa.
7259 If the data you are trying to access in a 32-bit segment lies within
7260 the first 64K of the segment, you may be able to get away with using
7261 an ordinary 16-bit addressing operation for the purpose; but sooner
7262 or later, you will want to do 32-bit addressing from 16-bit mode.
7264 The easiest way to do this is to make sure you use a register for
7265 the address, since any effective address containing a 32-bit
7266 register is forced to be a 32-bit address. So you can do
7268 \c mov eax,offset_into_32_bit_segment_specified_by_fs
7269 \c mov dword [fs:eax],0x11223344
7271 This is fine, but slightly cumbersome (since it wastes an
7272 instruction and a register) if you already know the precise offset
7273 you are aiming at. The x86 architecture does allow 32-bit effective
7274 addresses to specify nothing but a 4-byte offset, so why shouldn't
7275 NASM be able to generate the best instruction for the purpose?
7277 It can. As in \k{mixjump}, you need only prefix the address with the
7278 \c{DWORD} keyword, and it will be forced to be a 32-bit address:
7280 \c mov dword [fs:dword my_offset],0x11223344
7282 Also as in \k{mixjump}, NASM is not fussy about whether the
7283 \c{DWORD} prefix comes before or after the segment override, so
7284 arguably a nicer-looking way to code the above instruction is
7286 \c mov dword [dword fs:my_offset],0x11223344
7288 Don't confuse the \c{DWORD} prefix \e{outside} the square brackets,
7289 which controls the size of the data stored at the address, with the
7290 one \c{inside} the square brackets which controls the length of the
7291 address itself. The two can quite easily be different:
7293 \c mov word [dword 0x12345678],0x9ABC
7295 This moves 16 bits of data to an address specified by a 32-bit
7298 You can also specify \c{WORD} or \c{DWORD} prefixes along with the
7299 \c{FAR} prefix to indirect far jumps or calls. For example:
7301 \c call dword far [fs:word 0x4321]
7303 This instruction contains an address specified by a 16-bit offset;
7304 it loads a 48-bit far pointer from that (16-bit segment and 32-bit
7305 offset), and calls that address.
7308 \H{mixother} Other Mixed-Size Instructions
7310 The other way you might want to access data might be using the
7311 string instructions (\c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx} and so on) or the
7312 \c{XLATB} instruction. These instructions, since they take no
7313 parameters, might seem to have no easy way to make them perform
7314 32-bit addressing when assembled in a 16-bit segment.
7316 This is the purpose of NASM's \i\c{a16}, \i\c{a32} and \i\c{a64} prefixes. If
7317 you are coding \c{LODSB} in a 16-bit segment but it is supposed to
7318 be accessing a string in a 32-bit segment, you should load the
7319 desired address into \c{ESI} and then code
7323 The prefix forces the addressing size to 32 bits, meaning that
7324 \c{LODSB} loads from \c{[DS:ESI]} instead of \c{[DS:SI]}. To access
7325 a string in a 16-bit segment when coding in a 32-bit one, the
7326 corresponding \c{a16} prefix can be used.
7328 The \c{a16}, \c{a32} and \c{a64} prefixes can be applied to any instruction
7329 in NASM's instruction table, but most of them can generate all the
7330 useful forms without them. The prefixes are necessary only for
7331 instructions with implicit addressing:
7332 \# \c{CMPSx} (\k{insCMPSB}),
7333 \# \c{SCASx} (\k{insSCASB}), \c{LODSx} (\k{insLODSB}), \c{STOSx}
7334 \# (\k{insSTOSB}), \c{MOVSx} (\k{insMOVSB}), \c{INSx} (\k{insINSB}),
7335 \# \c{OUTSx} (\k{insOUTSB}), and \c{XLATB} (\k{insXLATB}).
7336 \c{CMPSx}, \c{SCASx}, \c{LODSx}, \c{STOSx}, \c{MOVSx}, \c{INSx},
7337 \c{OUTSx}, and \c{XLATB}.
7339 various push and pop instructions (\c{PUSHA} and \c{POPF} as well as
7340 the more usual \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}) can accept \c{a16}, \c{a32} or \c{a64}
7341 prefixes to force a particular one of \c{SP}, \c{ESP} or \c{RSP} to be used
7342 as a stack pointer, in case the stack segment in use is a different
7343 size from the code segment.
7345 \c{PUSH} and \c{POP}, when applied to segment registers in 32-bit
7346 mode, also have the slightly odd behaviour that they push and pop 4
7347 bytes at a time, of which the top two are ignored and the bottom two
7348 give the value of the segment register being manipulated. To force
7349 the 16-bit behaviour of segment-register push and pop instructions,
7350 you can use the operand-size prefix \i\c{o16}:
7355 This code saves a doubleword of stack space by fitting two segment
7356 registers into the space which would normally be consumed by pushing
7359 (You can also use the \i\c{o32} prefix to force the 32-bit behaviour
7360 when in 16-bit mode, but this seems less useful.)
7363 \C{64bit} Writing 64-bit Code (Unix, Win64)
7365 This chapter attempts to cover some of the common issues involved when
7366 writing 64-bit code, to run under \i{Win64} or Unix. It covers how to
7367 write assembly code to interface with 64-bit C routines, and how to
7368 write position-independent code for shared libraries.
7370 All 64-bit code uses a flat memory model, since segmentation is not
7371 available in 64-bit mode. The one exception is the \c{FS} and \c{GS}
7372 registers, which still add their bases.
7374 Position independence in 64-bit mode is significantly simpler, since
7375 the processor supports \c{RIP}-relative addressing directly; see the
7376 \c{REL} keyword (\k{effaddr}). On most 64-bit platforms, it is
7377 probably desirable to make that the default, using the directive
7378 \c{DEFAULT REL} (\k{default}).
7380 64-bit programming is relatively similar to 32-bit programming, but
7381 of course pointers are 64 bits long; additionally, all existing
7382 platforms pass arguments in registers rather than on the stack.
7383 Furthermore, 64-bit platforms use SSE2 by default for floating point.
7384 Please see the ABI documentation for your platform.
7386 64-bit platforms differ in the sizes of the fundamental datatypes, not
7387 just from 32-bit platforms but from each other. If a specific size
7388 data type is desired, it is probably best to use the types defined in
7389 the Standard C header \c{<inttypes.h>}.
7391 In 64-bit mode, the default instruction size is still 32 bits. When
7392 loading a value into a 32-bit register (but not an 8- or 16-bit
7393 register), the upper 32 bits of the corresponding 64-bit register are
7396 \H{reg64} Register Names in 64-bit Mode
7398 NASM uses the following names for general-purpose registers in 64-bit
7399 mode, for 8-, 16-, 32- and 64-bit references, respecitively:
7401 \c AL/AH, CL/CH, DL/DH, BL/BH, SPL, BPL, SIL, DIL, R8B-R15B
7402 \c AX, CX, DX, BX, SP, BP, SI, DI, R8W-R15W
7403 \c EAX, ECX, EDX, EBX, ESP, EBP, ESI, EDI, R8D-R15D
7404 \c RAX, RCX, RDX, RBX, RSP, RBP, RSI, RDI, R8-R15
7406 This is consistent with the AMD documentation and most other
7407 assemblers. The Intel documentation, however, uses the names
7408 \c{R8L-R15L} for 8-bit references to the higher registers. It is
7409 possible to use those names by definiting them as macros; similarly,
7410 if one wants to use numeric names for the low 8 registers, define them
7411 as macros. The standard macro package \c{altreg} (see \k{pkg_altreg})
7412 can be used for this purpose.
7414 \H{id64} Immediates and Displacements in 64-bit Mode
7416 In 64-bit mode, immediates and displacements are generally only 32
7417 bits wide. NASM will therefore truncate most displacements and
7418 immediates to 32 bits.
7420 The only instruction which takes a full \i{64-bit immediate} is:
7424 NASM will produce this instruction whenever the programmer uses
7425 \c{MOV} with an immediate into a 64-bit register. If this is not
7426 desirable, simply specify the equivalent 32-bit register, which will
7427 be automatically zero-extended by the processor, or specify the
7428 immediate as \c{DWORD}:
7430 \c mov rax,foo ; 64-bit immediate
7431 \c mov rax,qword foo ; (identical)
7432 \c mov eax,foo ; 32-bit immediate, zero-extended
7433 \c mov rax,dword foo ; 32-bit immediate, sign-extended
7435 The length of these instructions are 10, 5 and 7 bytes, respectively.
7437 The only instructions which take a full \I{64-bit displacement}64-bit
7438 \e{displacement} is loading or storing, using \c{MOV}, \c{AL}, \c{AX},
7439 \c{EAX} or \c{RAX} (but no other registers) to an absolute 64-bit address.
7440 Since this is a relatively rarely used instruction (64-bit code generally uses
7441 relative addressing), the programmer has to explicitly declare the
7442 displacement size as \c{QWORD}:
7446 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, sign-extended
7447 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; 32-bit absolute disp, zero-extended
7448 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7452 \c mov eax,[foo] ; 32-bit relative disp
7453 \c mov eax,[a32 foo] ; d:o, address truncated to 32 bits(!)
7454 \c mov eax,[qword foo] ; error
7455 \c mov eax,[abs qword foo] ; 64-bit absolute disp
7457 A sign-extended absolute displacement can access from -2 GB to +2 GB;
7458 a zero-extended absolute displacement can access from 0 to 4 GB.
7460 \H{unix64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Unix)
7462 On Unix, the 64-bit ABI is defined by the document:
7464 \W{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}\c{http://www.x86-64.org/documentation/abi.pdf}
7466 Although written for AT&T-syntax assembly, the concepts apply equally
7467 well for NASM-style assembly. What follows is a simplified summary.
7469 The first six integer arguments (from the left) are passed in \c{RDI},
7470 \c{RSI}, \c{RDX}, \c{RCX}, \c{R8}, and \c{R9}, in that order.
7471 Additional integer arguments are passed on the stack. These
7472 registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and \c{R11} are destroyed by function
7473 calls, and thus are available for use by the function without saving.
7475 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} and \c{RDX}, in that order.
7477 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7478 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM7};
7479 return is \c{XMM0} and \c{XMM1}. \c{long double} are passed on the
7480 stack, and returned in \c{ST0} and \c{ST1}.
7482 All SSE and x87 registers are destroyed by function calls.
7484 On 64-bit Unix, \c{long} is 64 bits.
7486 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted separately, so for the case of
7488 \c void foo(long a, double b, int c)
7490 \c{a} is passed in \c{RDI}, \c{b} in \c{XMM0}, and \c{c} in \c{ESI}.
7492 \H{win64} Interfacing to 64-bit C Programs (Win64)
7494 The Win64 ABI is described at:
7496 \W{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}\c{http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-gb/library/ms794533.aspx}
7498 What follows is a simplified summary.
7500 The first four integer arguments are passed in \c{RCX}, \c{RDX},
7501 \c{R8} and \c{R9}, in that order. Additional integer arguments are
7502 passed on the stack. These registers, plus \c{RAX}, \c{R10} and
7503 \c{R11} are destroyed by function calls, and thus are available for
7504 use by the function without saving.
7506 Integer return values are passed in \c{RAX} only.
7508 Floating point is done using SSE registers, except for \c{long
7509 double}. Floating-point arguments are passed in \c{XMM0} to \c{XMM3};
7510 return is \c{XMM0} only.
7512 On Win64, \c{long} is 32 bits; \c{long long} or \c{_int64} is 64 bits.
7514 Integer and SSE register arguments are counted together, so for the case of
7516 \c void foo(long long a, double b, int c)
7518 \c{a} is passed in \c{RCX}, \c{b} in \c{XMM1}, and \c{c} in \c{R8D}.
7520 \C{trouble} Troubleshooting
7522 This chapter describes some of the common problems that users have
7523 been known to encounter with NASM, and answers them. It also gives
7524 instructions for reporting bugs in NASM if you find a difficulty
7525 that isn't listed here.
7528 \H{problems} Common Problems
7530 \S{inefficient} NASM Generates \i{Inefficient Code}
7532 We sometimes get `bug' reports about NASM generating inefficient, or
7533 even `wrong', code on instructions such as \c{ADD ESP,8}. This is a
7534 deliberate design feature, connected to predictability of output:
7535 NASM, on seeing \c{ADD ESP,8}, will generate the form of the
7536 instruction which leaves room for a 32-bit offset. You need to code
7537 \I\c{BYTE}\c{ADD ESP,BYTE 8} if you want the space-efficient form of
7538 the instruction. This isn't a bug, it's user error: if you prefer to
7539 have NASM produce the more efficient code automatically enable
7540 optimization with the \c{-O} option (see \k{opt-O}).
7543 \S{jmprange} My Jumps are Out of Range\I{out of range, jumps}
7545 Similarly, people complain that when they issue \i{conditional
7546 jumps} (which are \c{SHORT} by default) that try to jump too far,
7547 NASM reports `short jump out of range' instead of making the jumps
7550 This, again, is partly a predictability issue, but in fact has a
7551 more practical reason as well. NASM has no means of being told what
7552 type of processor the code it is generating will be run on; so it
7553 cannot decide for itself that it should generate \i\c{Jcc NEAR} type
7554 instructions, because it doesn't know that it's working for a 386 or
7555 above. Alternatively, it could replace the out-of-range short
7556 \c{JNE} instruction with a very short \c{JE} instruction that jumps
7557 over a \c{JMP NEAR}; this is a sensible solution for processors
7558 below a 386, but hardly efficient on processors which have good
7559 branch prediction \e{and} could have used \c{JNE NEAR} instead. So,
7560 once again, it's up to the user, not the assembler, to decide what
7561 instructions should be generated. See \k{opt-O}.
7564 \S{proborg} \i\c{ORG} Doesn't Work
7566 People writing \i{boot sector} programs in the \c{bin} format often
7567 complain that \c{ORG} doesn't work the way they'd like: in order to
7568 place the \c{0xAA55} signature word at the end of a 512-byte boot
7569 sector, people who are used to MASM tend to code
7573 \c ; some boot sector code
7578 This is not the intended use of the \c{ORG} directive in NASM, and
7579 will not work. The correct way to solve this problem in NASM is to
7580 use the \i\c{TIMES} directive, like this:
7584 \c ; some boot sector code
7586 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7589 The \c{TIMES} directive will insert exactly enough zero bytes into
7590 the output to move the assembly point up to 510. This method also
7591 has the advantage that if you accidentally fill your boot sector too
7592 full, NASM will catch the problem at assembly time and report it, so
7593 you won't end up with a boot sector that you have to disassemble to
7594 find out what's wrong with it.
7597 \S{probtimes} \i\c{TIMES} Doesn't Work
7599 The other common problem with the above code is people who write the
7604 by reasoning that \c{$} should be a pure number, just like 510, so
7605 the difference between them is also a pure number and can happily be
7608 NASM is a \e{modular} assembler: the various component parts are
7609 designed to be easily separable for re-use, so they don't exchange
7610 information unnecessarily. In consequence, the \c{bin} output
7611 format, even though it has been told by the \c{ORG} directive that
7612 the \c{.text} section should start at 0, does not pass that
7613 information back to the expression evaluator. So from the
7614 evaluator's point of view, \c{$} isn't a pure number: it's an offset
7615 from a section base. Therefore the difference between \c{$} and 510
7616 is also not a pure number, but involves a section base. Values
7617 involving section bases cannot be passed as arguments to \c{TIMES}.
7619 The solution, as in the previous section, is to code the \c{TIMES}
7622 \c TIMES 510-($-$$) DB 0
7624 in which \c{$} and \c{$$} are offsets from the same section base,
7625 and so their difference is a pure number. This will solve the
7626 problem and generate sensible code.
7629 \H{bugs} \i{Bugs}\I{reporting bugs}
7631 We have never yet released a version of NASM with any \e{known}
7632 bugs. That doesn't usually stop there being plenty we didn't know
7633 about, though. Any that you find should be reported firstly via the
7635 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7636 (click on "Bugs"), or if that fails then through one of the
7637 contacts in \k{contact}.
7639 Please read \k{qstart} first, and don't report the bug if it's
7640 listed in there as a deliberate feature. (If you think the feature
7641 is badly thought out, feel free to send us reasons why you think it
7642 should be changed, but don't just send us mail saying `This is a
7643 bug' if the documentation says we did it on purpose.) Then read
7644 \k{problems}, and don't bother reporting the bug if it's listed
7647 If you do report a bug, \e{please} give us all of the following
7650 \b What operating system you're running NASM under. DOS, Linux,
7651 NetBSD, Win16, Win32, VMS (I'd be impressed), whatever.
7653 \b If you're running NASM under DOS or Win32, tell us whether you've
7654 compiled your own executable from the DOS source archive, or whether
7655 you were using the standard distribution binaries out of the
7656 archive. If you were using a locally built executable, try to
7657 reproduce the problem using one of the standard binaries, as this
7658 will make it easier for us to reproduce your problem prior to fixing
7661 \b Which version of NASM you're using, and exactly how you invoked
7662 it. Give us the precise command line, and the contents of the
7663 \c{NASMENV} environment variable if any.
7665 \b Which versions of any supplementary programs you're using, and
7666 how you invoked them. If the problem only becomes visible at link
7667 time, tell us what linker you're using, what version of it you've
7668 got, and the exact linker command line. If the problem involves
7669 linking against object files generated by a compiler, tell us what
7670 compiler, what version, and what command line or options you used.
7671 (If you're compiling in an IDE, please try to reproduce the problem
7672 with the command-line version of the compiler.)
7674 \b If at all possible, send us a NASM source file which exhibits the
7675 problem. If this causes copyright problems (e.g. you can only
7676 reproduce the bug in restricted-distribution code) then bear in mind
7677 the following two points: firstly, we guarantee that any source code
7678 sent to us for the purposes of debugging NASM will be used \e{only}
7679 for the purposes of debugging NASM, and that we will delete all our
7680 copies of it as soon as we have found and fixed the bug or bugs in
7681 question; and secondly, we would prefer \e{not} to be mailed large
7682 chunks of code anyway. The smaller the file, the better. A
7683 three-line sample file that does nothing useful \e{except}
7684 demonstrate the problem is much easier to work with than a
7685 fully fledged ten-thousand-line program. (Of course, some errors
7686 \e{do} only crop up in large files, so this may not be possible.)
7688 \b A description of what the problem actually \e{is}. `It doesn't
7689 work' is \e{not} a helpful description! Please describe exactly what
7690 is happening that shouldn't be, or what isn't happening that should.
7691 Examples might be: `NASM generates an error message saying Line 3
7692 for an error that's actually on Line 5'; `NASM generates an error
7693 message that I believe it shouldn't be generating at all'; `NASM
7694 fails to generate an error message that I believe it \e{should} be
7695 generating'; `the object file produced from this source code crashes
7696 my linker'; `the ninth byte of the output file is 66 and I think it
7697 should be 77 instead'.
7699 \b If you believe the output file from NASM to be faulty, send it to
7700 us. That allows us to determine whether our own copy of NASM
7701 generates the same file, or whether the problem is related to
7702 portability issues between our development platforms and yours. We
7703 can handle binary files mailed to us as MIME attachments, uuencoded,
7704 and even BinHex. Alternatively, we may be able to provide an FTP
7705 site you can upload the suspect files to; but mailing them is easier
7708 \b Any other information or data files that might be helpful. If,
7709 for example, the problem involves NASM failing to generate an object
7710 file while TASM can generate an equivalent file without trouble,
7711 then send us \e{both} object files, so we can see what TASM is doing
7712 differently from us.
7715 \A{ndisasm} \i{Ndisasm}
7717 The Netwide Disassembler, NDISASM
7719 \H{ndisintro} Introduction
7722 The Netwide Disassembler is a small companion program to the Netwide
7723 Assembler, NASM. It seemed a shame to have an x86 assembler,
7724 complete with a full instruction table, and not make as much use of
7725 it as possible, so here's a disassembler which shares the
7726 instruction table (and some other bits of code) with NASM.
7728 The Netwide Disassembler does nothing except to produce
7729 disassemblies of \e{binary} source files. NDISASM does not have any
7730 understanding of object file formats, like \c{objdump}, and it will
7731 not understand \c{DOS .EXE} files like \c{debug} will. It just
7735 \H{ndisstart} Getting Started: Installation
7737 See \k{install} for installation instructions. NDISASM, like NASM,
7738 has a \c{man page} which you may want to put somewhere useful, if you
7739 are on a Unix system.
7742 \H{ndisrun} Running NDISASM
7744 To disassemble a file, you will typically use a command of the form
7746 \c ndisasm -b {16|32|64} filename
7748 NDISASM can disassemble 16-, 32- or 64-bit code equally easily,
7749 provided of course that you remember to specify which it is to work
7750 with. If no \i\c{-b} switch is present, NDISASM works in 16-bit mode
7751 by default. The \i\c{-u} switch (for USE32) also invokes 32-bit mode.
7753 Two more command line options are \i\c{-r} which reports the version
7754 number of NDISASM you are running, and \i\c{-h} which gives a short
7755 summary of command line options.
7758 \S{ndiscom} COM Files: Specifying an Origin
7760 To disassemble a \c{DOS .COM} file correctly, a disassembler must assume
7761 that the first instruction in the file is loaded at address \c{0x100},
7762 rather than at zero. NDISASM, which assumes by default that any file
7763 you give it is loaded at zero, will therefore need to be informed of
7766 The \i\c{-o} option allows you to declare a different origin for the
7767 file you are disassembling. Its argument may be expressed in any of
7768 the NASM numeric formats: decimal by default, if it begins with `\c{$}'
7769 or `\c{0x}' or ends in `\c{H}' it's \c{hex}, if it ends in `\c{Q}' it's
7770 \c{octal}, and if it ends in `\c{B}' it's \c{binary}.
7772 Hence, to disassemble a \c{.COM} file:
7774 \c ndisasm -o100h filename.com
7779 \S{ndissync} Code Following Data: Synchronisation
7781 Suppose you are disassembling a file which contains some data which
7782 isn't machine code, and \e{then} contains some machine code. NDISASM
7783 will faithfully plough through the data section, producing machine
7784 instructions wherever it can (although most of them will look
7785 bizarre, and some may have unusual prefixes, e.g. `\c{FS OR AX,0x240A}'),
7786 and generating `DB' instructions ever so often if it's totally stumped.
7787 Then it will reach the code section.
7789 Supposing NDISASM has just finished generating a strange machine
7790 instruction from part of the data section, and its file position is
7791 now one byte \e{before} the beginning of the code section. It's
7792 entirely possible that another spurious instruction will get
7793 generated, starting with the final byte of the data section, and
7794 then the correct first instruction in the code section will not be
7795 seen because the starting point skipped over it. This isn't really
7798 To avoid this, you can specify a `\i\c{synchronisation}' point, or indeed
7799 as many synchronisation points as you like (although NDISASM can
7800 only handle 8192 sync points internally). The definition of a sync
7801 point is this: NDISASM guarantees to hit sync points exactly during
7802 disassembly. If it is thinking about generating an instruction which
7803 would cause it to jump over a sync point, it will discard that
7804 instruction and output a `\c{db}' instead. So it \e{will} start
7805 disassembly exactly from the sync point, and so you \e{will} see all
7806 the instructions in your code section.
7808 Sync points are specified using the \i\c{-s} option: they are measured
7809 in terms of the program origin, not the file position. So if you
7810 want to synchronize after 32 bytes of a \c{.COM} file, you would have to
7813 \c ndisasm -o100h -s120h file.com
7817 \c ndisasm -o100h -s20h file.com
7819 As stated above, you can specify multiple sync markers if you need
7820 to, just by repeating the \c{-s} option.
7823 \S{ndisisync} Mixed Code and Data: Automatic (Intelligent) Synchronisation
7826 Suppose you are disassembling the boot sector of a \c{DOS} floppy (maybe
7827 it has a virus, and you need to understand the virus so that you
7828 know what kinds of damage it might have done you). Typically, this
7829 will contain a \c{JMP} instruction, then some data, then the rest of the
7830 code. So there is a very good chance of NDISASM being \e{misaligned}
7831 when the data ends and the code begins. Hence a sync point is
7834 On the other hand, why should you have to specify the sync point
7835 manually? What you'd do in order to find where the sync point would
7836 be, surely, would be to read the \c{JMP} instruction, and then to use
7837 its target address as a sync point. So can NDISASM do that for you?
7839 The answer, of course, is yes: using either of the synonymous
7840 switches \i\c{-a} (for automatic sync) or \i\c{-i} (for intelligent
7841 sync) will enable \c{auto-sync} mode. Auto-sync mode automatically
7842 generates a sync point for any forward-referring PC-relative jump or
7843 call instruction that NDISASM encounters. (Since NDISASM is one-pass,
7844 if it encounters a PC-relative jump whose target has already been
7845 processed, there isn't much it can do about it...)
7847 Only PC-relative jumps are processed, since an absolute jump is
7848 either through a register (in which case NDISASM doesn't know what
7849 the register contains) or involves a segment address (in which case
7850 the target code isn't in the same segment that NDISASM is working
7851 in, and so the sync point can't be placed anywhere useful).
7853 For some kinds of file, this mechanism will automatically put sync
7854 points in all the right places, and save you from having to place
7855 any sync points manually. However, it should be stressed that
7856 auto-sync mode is \e{not} guaranteed to catch all the sync points, and
7857 you may still have to place some manually.
7859 Auto-sync mode doesn't prevent you from declaring manual sync
7860 points: it just adds automatically generated ones to the ones you
7861 provide. It's perfectly feasible to specify \c{-i} \e{and} some \c{-s}
7864 Another caveat with auto-sync mode is that if, by some unpleasant
7865 fluke, something in your data section should disassemble to a
7866 PC-relative call or jump instruction, NDISASM may obediently place a
7867 sync point in a totally random place, for example in the middle of
7868 one of the instructions in your code section. So you may end up with
7869 a wrong disassembly even if you use auto-sync. Again, there isn't
7870 much I can do about this. If you have problems, you'll have to use
7871 manual sync points, or use the \c{-k} option (documented below) to
7872 suppress disassembly of the data area.
7875 \S{ndisother} Other Options
7877 The \i\c{-e} option skips a header on the file, by ignoring the first N
7878 bytes. This means that the header is \e{not} counted towards the
7879 disassembly offset: if you give \c{-e10 -o10}, disassembly will start
7880 at byte 10 in the file, and this will be given offset 10, not 20.
7882 The \i\c{-k} option is provided with two comma-separated numeric
7883 arguments, the first of which is an assembly offset and the second
7884 is a number of bytes to skip. This \e{will} count the skipped bytes
7885 towards the assembly offset: its use is to suppress disassembly of a
7886 data section which wouldn't contain anything you wanted to see
7890 \H{ndisbugs} Bugs and Improvements
7892 There are no known bugs. However, any you find, with patches if
7893 possible, should be sent to
7894 \W{mailto:nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}\c{nasm-bugs@lists.sourceforge.net}, or to the
7896 \W{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}\c{https://sourceforge.net/projects/nasm/}
7897 and we'll try to fix them. Feel free to send contributions and
7898 new features as well.
7900 \A{inslist} \i{Instruction List}
7902 \H{inslistintro} Introduction
7904 The following sections show the instructions which NASM currently supports. For each
7905 instruction, there is a separate entry for each supported addressing mode. The third
7906 column shows the processor type in which the instruction was introduced and,
7907 when appropriate, one or more usage flags.
7911 \A{changelog} \i{NASM Version History}